Home

Intel AC450NX Stereo System User Manual

1. Ze as ee e e e e e A B OM07321 Figure 13 10 CPU Baseboard A Standoff six B Screw twelve 145 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Add in Boards The PHP I O baseboard provides 10 PCI bus master slots and one ISA bus master slot They accept any add in PCI and ISA boards or any add in board that is compatible with an IBM PC ATT or PC STT system except for an 8 bit drop card that fits only in an 8 bit PC XT connector One PCI slot shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with the ISA slot you can use the slot for either PCI or the ISA but not both A CAUTION Some accessory option card outputs may exceed Class 2 or limited power source limits and must use appropriate interconnecting cabling in accordance with the National Electric Code during installation Do not overload the PHP I O baseboard by installing add in boards that draw excessive current For expansion slot current limitations see Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Add in boards can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling After removing the board from the protective wrapper or from the baseboard place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface Do not slide the board over any surfa
2. OM07335 Figure 2 1 Server UO Connections PS 2 compatible keyboard mouse port 6 pin connector PS 2 compatible keyboard mouse port 6 pin connector PS 2 compatible serial port 2 COM2 9 pin RS 232 connector PS 2 compatible serial port 1 COM1 9 pin RS 232 connector Super VGA compatible 15 pin video connector PS 2 compatible parallel port LPT 25 pin bidirectional subminiature D connector USB ports 0 and 1 4 pin connectors External LVDS SCSI connector Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB port 1 and 2 SEMCONNT 6 pin connector Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server Obtaining a Power Cord Set A WARNING Do not attempt to modify or use an AC power cord that is not the exact type required Because a power cord is not supplied for the server you must obtain a power cord that meets the following criteria For North America the cord must be UL Listed CSA Certified 14 3 75 C type SJT with NEMA 6 15P attachment plug and IEC 320 C19 outlet For outside North America the cord must be flexible VDE certified or lt HAR gt harmonized rated 250 V 0 75 mm minimum conductor size with IEC 320 C19 outlet and rated for no less than the product ratings The attachment plug shall be a three conductor grounding type rated 125 of the total input current rating of the product and must be for the configuration in the specif
3. OM07349 Figure 1 3 Chassis Front View A 3 5 inch diskette drive 3 5 inch bay B CD ROM drive 5 25 inch bay C Hot swap bays 22 zzra ronmoon Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server A BCD ZIQ TNn m OM07300 Figure 1 4 Chassis Rear View PCI and ISA add in board expansion slots External LVDS connector PS 2 compatible keyboard mouse port 6 pin PS 2 compatible keyboard mouse port 6 pin PS 2 compatible serial ports 0 and 1 9 pin RS 232 connector Super VGA compatible 15 pin video connector PS 2 compatible parallel port LPT 25 pin bidirectional subminiature D connector USB ports 0 and 1 4 pin connector Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB connectors port 1 and 2 Power Supplies Failure LED yellow Predictive failure LED yellow for power supply fan Power LED green AC input power connector 23 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Controls and Indicators Item Feature Front Panel
4. Ea LH 1 Ly 1 LJ L I m 1 PS OM07314 Figure 18 1 J31 Jumper Block Table 18 1 J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management Pins 1 and 2 1 1 0 0 Pins 3 and 4 1 0 1 0 Key 0 open 1 closed 220 Status Disable VRMs Reserved Disable Server Management Default Normal Operation Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Installing jumpers across pins 5 and 6 7 and 8 and 9 and 10 determines the processor core to FSB frequency ratios The bus frequency is 100 MHz The core frequencies are based on the 100 MHz bus frequency Table 18 2 J31 Jumpers for Bus Ratios Pins 5 and 6 Pins 7 and 8 Pins 9 and 10 Bus Ratio Core Frequency MHz 1 1 1 Reserved 1 1 0 9 2 450 1 0 1 7 2 350 1 0 0 Reserved 0 1 1 5 1 500 0 1 0 4 1 400 0 0 1 3 1 300 0 0 0 Reserved Key 0 open 1 closed The jumper block provides three parking positions for storing the jumpers They can be parked across pins 11 and 12 13 and 14 and 15 and 16 Changing a Jumper Setting 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Turn off the server and unplug the power cord Remove the top and left side covers See Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling From the tables above determine which jumper you need to move Then move it to the new
5. Rivolgersi ad un tecnico specializzato per la riparazione dei componenti dell alimentazione di questo prodotto E possibile che il prodotto disponga di pi fonti di alimentazione Non modificare o utilizzare il cavo di alimentazione in c a fornito dal produttore se non corrisponde esattamente al tipo richiesto L interruttore attivato disattivato nel pannello anteriore non interrompe l alimentazione in c a del sistema Per interromperla necessario scollegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione in c a dalle prese a muro o dall alimentazione di corrente PASSI DI SICUREZZA Qualora si rimuovano le coperture del telaio per accedere all interno del sistema seguire i seguenti passi 1 Spegnere tutti i dispositivi periferici collegati al sistema 2 Spegnere il sistema usando il pulsante spento acceso dell interruttore del sistema 3 Togliere tutte le spine dei cavi del sistema dalle prese elettriche 4 Identificare e sconnettere tutti i cavi attaccati ai collegamenti I O od alle prese installate sul retro del sistema 5 Qualora si tocchino i componenti proteggersi dallo scarico elettrostatico SES portando un cinghia anti statica da polso che attaccata alla presa a terra del telaio del sistema qualsiasi superficie non dipinta 6 Non far operare il sistema quando il telaio senza le coperture Dopo aver seguito i sei passi di SICUREZZA sopracitati togliere le coperture del telaio del sistema co
6. 250 Power SY EE 251 Power Supply Input Wollaqes EE 252 Power Supply Output Voltages u eek Ee AEN eh 252 Server Current USAGES EE 253 Calculating Power Usage E 254 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing Watrni gs and AUT ONG E 257 Tools and Supplies You Need WEE 257 Equipment Log tn een 257 Backup Battery Sanieren 258 Replacing the Back up Battery ss 259 xi AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Elle Eeer 261 Resetting the EE 261 Initial Startup e 262 A Ae Pm enge 262 Running New Application Goftware sis 263 Checkliste ia ine 263 After the Server Has Been Running Correctly Us 263 Checklist x ac EE 263 More Troubleshooting Procedures cimas 264 Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing oocooooooccccnnncoccconcccnnnccnnananccnnnnonnnnnnnnos 264 Monitoring e EE 264 Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights 265 Confirming Loading of the Operating System 24444snneennennnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennn nn 265 Specific Problems and Corrective Actions 265 Power Light Does Not Liria idea 266 Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly ooooooocccccccccccnccconoccncconanannnncccnnnncnnnnnnns 266 No Characters Appear on Screen 267 Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect AAA 267 Incorrect or NO Beep Codes esse 267 Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light 268 Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light 268 Probl
7. DEV_ADDRESS which are found in the FRU file header in each FRU file The LUN address is optional If the LUN address is used it must start with an L Usage FRUSDR d fru device lun bus addr addr2 etc Example FRUSDR D FRU IMBDEVICE L00 00 CO C2 The configuration file may be used to load multiple FRU and SDR files In the configuration file you may define which FRU and SDR areas are to be programmed Additionally you may request information from the user or ask the user to choose which areas to program To read this area Enter this command line UO Baseboard FRU frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE FF 20 Front Panel FRU frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE 00 22 CPU baseboard FRU frusdr d fru DS1624S 01 98 Top Mem Mod FRU frusdr d fru DS1624S 01 9A Bottom Mem Mod FRU frusdr d fru DS1624S 01 9E Interconnect Backplane FRU frusdr d fru AT24C02 01 A2 I O Riser FRU frusdr d fru AT24C02 01 AE Power Distribution Backplane FUR frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE LO2 00 22 SCSI Hot Swap Backplane FRU frusdr d fru IMBDEVICE 00 CO Term card in Slot 1 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 AO Term card in Slot 2 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 A4 Term card in Slot 3 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 A8 Term card in Slot 4 frusdr d fru AT24C02 03 AC 91 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Displaying a Given Area When the utility is run with the d DMI d FRU or d SDR command line flag the indicated area is displayed Each area repres
8. 178 Memory Board 1 2 Interface Connector J6 amp Ji 179 Power Supply Connectors J8 J9 amp J10 181 Peripheral Power Connector J11 iii 181 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 16 Peripheral Bay Backplane Description Warnings and ent 183 Peripheral Bay Backplane seri 183 SCSI ID CONGO ii 184 Peripheral Bay Backplane Connectors ANEN 184 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Warnings and Cautions Mer ee ee ee 185 PHP Input Output 1 0 Baseboard Features 185 32 bit PCI Expansion Slots zu een 186 64 bit PCI Hot plug Expansion Slots nennen 186 ISA Expansion E EE 186 PENOSO Controller odds 187 Symbios 536896 SCSI Gontr ller use 190 IDE Controller u ea ea re near Sather ties eier 190 ServerManagementiSMi aa 190 VO Riser Gardasee ee eine 192 PHP I O Baseboard Configuration Jumpers AEN 193 Restoring CMOS to Default Values nn nccnnnnns 194 Blearing tne PassWward a2 aa 195 Updating He BIOS anne ea 195 Updating BMC FPC and HCS Firmware ooccccccccccnnncnannnccnnnnccnnnnnancncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnn 198 ee EE 199 PHP I O Baseboard Layout Naar are 200 PHP I O Baseboard ee Ee 201 Expander Bus Connector Signal Section EE 201 Expander Bus Connector Power Section 204 S2 DIGPCl COMES EE 205 64 bit PCl G nneslera nann ne ege E 206 ISA COMNGCION use A een 207 Diskette Drive Kier eet eegene ege 208
9. CAUTION Te 10 11 12 13 Use extreme care when installing a DIMM Applying too much pressure can damage the socket slot DIMMs are keyed such that they can be inserted in only one way Insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into socket J1 and press down firmly on the DIMM until it seats correctly Figure 19 6 OM06767 Figure 19 6 Properly Seated DIMM Repeat the above steps to install more DIMMs Always install them in sequence by installing the next DIMM in bank A socket J2 and so on with the last one in bank D socket J16 Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 13 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12 Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server Turn on your monitor and then your server Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory Failure to do so may degrade the performance of your server For information about running the SSU see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 241 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Removing DIMMs See Figure 19 7 242 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 3 Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 4 Starting with the first DIMM filled socket closest to the top edge of the module remove
10. Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 4 Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 2 B C to pins 2 A B to allow the server to boot from the recovery BIOS 5 Reinstall the top and side covers plug in the power cords and insert the Flash Update Utility diskette in drive A 197 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 6 10 Turn on the monitor and server After the server boots the speaker emits a single beep and the recovery process starts it takes about three minutes When the recovery process completes the speaker emits two beeps While in the recovery mode there is no screen display on the monitor The keyboard is disabled as the server automatically recovers the BIOS The following beep codes describe the recovery status Beep Code Message 1 Recovery process starting 2 Successful completion no errors 4 The server could not boot from the diskette it may not be bootable Continuous series The wrong BIOS recovery files are being used and or the flash memory jumper of low beeps is in the wrong position After successful completion of restoring the recovery BIOS remove the diskette turn off the server and monitor unplug the power cords and remove the top and right side covers Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 2 A B to pins 2 B C the normal boot mode Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords After running the special recovery mode run the SSU to specify a new password See Chapter 5 System
11. Use the following keys to navigate through the menus and submenus Press Fi ESC 7 y e gt o Enter F9 F10 To Get help about an item Go back to a previous item Select the previous value in a menu option list Select the next value in a menu option list Select a major menu Change the value of the current menu item to the previous value Change the value of the current menu item to the next value Activate submenus select feature options and change feature values Display the following message Setup Confirmation Load default configuration now Yes No The Yes button will be highlighted If you press lt Enter gt all Setup fields return to their default values If you press lt ESC gt or select No the server returns to the configuration it had before you pressed lt F9 gt without affecting any existing field values Display the following message Setup Confirmation Save configuration changes and exit now Yes No The Yes button will be highlighted If you press lt Enter gt all current Setup values are saved and the system is reset If you press lt ESC gt or select No the server returns to the configuration it had before you pressed lt F10 gt without affecting any existing values Main Menu Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Default values are in bold typeface and auto configured values are shaded Feature System Time System Date Legacy Diskette A Legacy Diskette B
12. Primary Master Autotype Fixed Disk Type Multi sector Transfers LBA Mode Control 32 bit I O Transfer Mode Ultra DMA Mode Primary Slave Autotype Fixed Disk Option HH MM SS MM DD YYYY Disabled 360 KB 5 4 1 2 MB 5 4 720 KB 3 Lei 1 44 1 25 MB 3 2 2 88 MB 3 Y Disabled 360 KB 5 4 1 2 MB 5 4 720 KB 3 Lei 1 44 1 25 MB 3 12 2 88 MB 3 Y CD ROM Press lt Enter gt User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Standard Disabled None Press lt Enter gt Description Set the System Time To select a field press lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab gt or lt Enter gt Then type in a new value If you replace the battery the default time is 00 00 This is a 24 hour clock Set the System Date To select a field press lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab gt or lt Enter gt Then type in a new value If you replace the battery the default date is Jan 1990 Select the diskette type for drive A The 1 25 MB 3 5 inch refers to a 1024 byte sector Japanese media format To support the 1 25 MB 3 5 inch requires a 3 5 inch 3 mode diskette drive Select the diskette type for drive B The size 1 25 MB 3 5 inch refers to a 1024 byte sector Japanese media format To support the 1 25 MB 3 5 inch requires a 3 5 inch 3 mode diskette drive Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive
13. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 If you removed an ISA add in board run the SSU to configure the system For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 149 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide I O Riser Card Removing the l O Riser Card See Figure 13 14 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB signal cable from J1 on the I O riser card Remove and save the screw Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners carefully pull it toward you until the edge connector of the card pulls free from its connector J2A1 on the PHP I O baseboard Make sure that you do not scrape the card against other components Place the card on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the I O Riser Card See Figure 13 14 150 1 2 Remove the VO riser card from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners carefully insert the edge connector of the card into connector J2A1 on the PHP I O baseboard Press the card firmly into the connector Insert the screw you removed earlier in the threaded hole in the chassis Tigh
14. Signal MD_L 4 GND RCGCLK1 A B GND MEM A B _ TMS MA_L 13 MA_L 10 1 5V MA_L 5 GND RCGCLKO A B GND ROW_L 1 5V CMNDO_L GND SDRAM A B _CLK GND Reserved Reserved MD_L 67 1 5V MD_L 63 GND MD_L 59 GND MD_L 57 GND Reserved 1 5V MD_L 51 GND MD_L 47 1 5V MD_L 43 GND MD_L 38 1 5V Pin E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 E47 E48 E49 E50 E51 E52 E53 E54 225 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide UO Connector 226 1 0 Connector J22 Rows A B C Signal X1CLK GND X1D_L 15 X1D_L 14 X1D_L 12 GND X1D_L 9 X1D_L 8 X1D_L 6 GND GND I2C_FPC_SDA 12C_FPC_SCL VCC_STDBY ISP_SDI INTRUSION_L ISP_SDO RI_TTL_FP CTS_TTL_FP GND XOCLK GND XOD_L 15 XOD_L 14 XOD_L 12 GND XOD_L 9 XOD_L 8 XOD_L 6 GND XOD_L 4 XOD_L 3 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 Signal 5V_RET_ SENSE GND X1D_L 13 GND X1D_L 10 GND X1D_L 7 GND X1D_L 5 GND X1D_L 2 GND X1XRTS_L GND DS2P_l2C_SDA GND VCC_ STDBY GND FAN FAILED L GND RTS TTL ER GND ISP_CONNECTOR_SCLK GND Dep TTL FP GND XOD_L 13 GND XOD_L 10 GND XOD_L 7 GND X0D_L 5 GND XOD_L 2 GND
15. 27 MA 3 28 GND 29 MA 0 30 GND 31 BANK1 32 GND 33 PHIT 34 GND 35 Unused 36 GND 37 MD 69 38 GND 39 MD 64 B GND MD 32 GND MD 28 GND MD 24 GND GND GND GND GND MD 16 GND MD 11 GND MD 7 GND MD 3 GND MD 0 GND TRST GND MA 9 GND MA 4 GND MA 1 GND CMND1 GND CARD GND RHIT GND MD 71 GND MD 66 GND Signals C MD 34 GND DSTBN1 GND DSTBP1 GND MD 21 GND MD 17 GND Was DOFFO_L GND MD 13 GND DSTBPO GND DSTBNO GND MD 1 GND TDI GND MA 11 GND MA 6 GND MA 2 GND CSTB GND BANK2 GND RCMPLT GND Unused GND MD 68 GND DSTBN3 D GND MD 31 GND MD 27 GND MD 23 GND MD 19 GND Was DSEL GND MD 15 GND MD 10 GND MD 6 GND GND GND GND GND MA 13 GND MA 8 GND GND GND GND GND BANKO GND GND GND GND GND MD 70 GND MD 65 GND E MD 33 1 5V MD 29 GND MD 25 1 5V MD 20 GND MD 18 GND Was DOFF1_L 1 5V MD 12 GND MD 8 1 5V MD 4 GND SPARECLKO GND TMS GND MA 10 1 5V MA 5 GND RCGCLK GND ROW 1 5V CMNDO GND SPARECLK1 GND Unused GND MD 67 1 5V MD 63 continued Chapter 15 Midplane Description Voltages Grand Connector to Mem A J4 and Mem B J1 continued Pins 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 A GND MD 60 GND MUXCLK1 GND MD 54 GND MD 53 GND MD 48 GND MD 44 GND MD 40
16. GND B MD 62 GND GND GND GND GND Was DVALID GND MD 50 GND MD 46 GND MD 42 GND MD 37 Signals C D GND MD 61 DSTBP3 GND GND MD 58 MD 56 GND GND MD 55 Unused GND GND Was WDEVT MD 52 GND GND MD 49 DSTBP2 GND GND MD 45 DSTBN2 GND GND MD 41 MD 39 GND GND MD 36 E GND MD 59 GND MD 57 GND Was DCMPLT 1 5V MD 51 GND MD 47 1 5V MD 43 GND MD 38 1 5V Grand Connector Power Module 1 Connector J2 Pins P1X1 P1X2 P1X3 P2X1 P2X2 P2X3 P1X1 P1X2 P1X3 P2X1 P2X2 P2X3 P1X1 P1X2 P1X3 P2X1 P2X2 P2X3 A GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V Signals 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V 12V DV DV DV DV DV DV DV DV DV DV DV DV 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 177 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Grand Connector Power Module 2 Connector J5 Signals Pins A B c D E P1X1 GND GND 12V 5V 3 3V P1X2 GND GND 12V 5V 3 3V P1X3 GND GND 12V 5V 3 3V P2X1 GND GND 12V 5V 3 3V P2X2 GND GND 12V 5V 3 3V P2X3 GND GND 12V 5V 3 3V P1X1 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P1X2 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P1X3 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P2X1 GND GND 12V 5V 5V
17. If the utility fails it immediately exits with an error message and exit code 96 9 Hot swappable Fans Hot Swapping This chapter tells how to hot swap a fan When the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on you can determine which fan is defective by checking the yellow fan failure LEDs mounted next to each fan When a fan fails the LED will be on continuously However you do not need to shut the server down to hot swap a failed fan Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 2 bit e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server 97 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Hot Swapping a Fan The server contains six fans in a 5 1 redundant configuration for cooling system components If a single fan fails the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on A fan fail LED mounted next to each fan identifies the failed fan You can easily hot swap the defective fan without turning the server power off CAUTION Even though the server can continue operating with only five fans the defective fan must be replaced in a reasonable amount of time Removing a Fan See Figure 9 1 1 Remove and save the screw that secures the fan array cover 2 Sl
18. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Run the SSU to restore the configuration settings to the RTC For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 259 AC450NX Server System Product Guide 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages This chapter helps you identify and solve problems that might occur while you are using the server For detailed instructions about removing or installing a component or checking jumpers see the chapter whose number appears in parentheses after a given checklist item Also check the Contents and Index for specific page locations Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Resetting the Server You can reset the server in several ways Manually Press To lt Ctrl Alt Del gt Clear server memory and reload the operating system This is a soft boot reset Reset button Clear server memory restart POST and reload the operating system Power off on Turn the server power off and then on This is a cold boot reset it has the same effect as pushing the reset button except that power is halted to all peripherals Programmed You can reset the server with software 261 AC450NX Rack Server System Product
19. S45 DB 5 DB 6 DB 7 DB P S46 S47 S48 S49 S50 851 TERMPWR 852 TERMPWR S53 RESERVED S54 S55 ATN S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 S67 BSY ACK RST MSG SEL C D REQ 1 0 DB8 DB 9 DB 10 DB 11 gies A A cee A SS A E A A A ee 283 A Regulatory Specifications The AC450NX server meets specifications and regulations for safety and EMC Declaration of Compliance The CE marking on this product indicates that it is in compliance with the European community s EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73123 EEC Safety Compliance USA Canada UL 1950 CSA 950 95 Europe TUV to EN60950 A1 A2 A3 A4 EU Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC CE Mark International CB Certificate to IEC950 plus EMKO TSE 74 SEC 207 94 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC USA FCC 47 CFR Parts 2 and 15 Class A Canada ICES 003 Class A Europe EN55022 Class A EN50082 1 EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharge ESD EN61000 4 3 Radiated Immunity IEN61000 4 4 Electrical Fast Transient EN 61000 3 2 3 Harmonic Currents EU EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE Mark International CISPR 22 Class A Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3548 Class A Limits using CISPR 22 Class A Limits Japan VCCI Class A ITE using CISPR 22 Class A Limit 285 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice USA This equipment h
20. These ports support external devices such as modems and scanners that require serial data transmission 1 5 6 9 OM00932A Pin Signal 1 DCD data carrier detect 2 RXD receive data 3 TXD transmit data 4 DTR data terminal ready 5 GND Ground 6 DSR data set ready 7 RTS request to send 8 CTS clear to send 9 RIA ring indicator 213 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Parallel Port The IEEE 1284 compatible parallel port used primarily for a printer sends data in parallel format 13 1 25 14 OM00933A Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 STROBE_L 14 AUFDXT_L auto feed 2 Data bit 0 15 ERROR_L 3 Data bit 1 16 INIT_L initialize printer 4 Data bit 2 17 SLCTIN_L select input 5 Data bit 3 18 GND Ground 6 Data bit 4 19 GND 7 Data bit 5 20 GND 8 Data bit 6 21 GND 9 Data bit 7 22 GND 10 ACK_L acknowledge 23 GND 11 BUSY 24 GND 12 PE paper end 25 GND 13 SLCT select ICMB Connectors 214 The ICMB device provides external access to the ICMB devices that are within the chassis This makes it possible to externally access chassis management functions alert logs post mortem data etc The device also provides a mechanism for chassis power control The server provides two SEMCONN 6 pin connectors to allow daisy chained cabling No connection OM06193A Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 3 positive 4 negative 5 6 No connection Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description
21. 2 Turn off the system by using the push button on off power switch on the system 3 Unplug all AC power cords from the system or from wall outlets 4 Label and disconnect all cables connected to I O connectors or ports on the back of the system 5 Provide some electrostatic discharge ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground of the system any unpainted metal surface when handling components 6 Do not operate the system with the chassis covers removed After you have completed the six SAFETY steps above you can remove the system covers To do this 1 Remove and save all screws from the covers 2 Remove the covers For proper cooling and airflow always reinstall the chassis covers before turning on the system Operating the system without the covers in place can damage system parts To install the covers 1 Check first to make sure you have not left loose tools or parts inside the system 2 Check that cables add in boards and other components are properly installed 3 Attach the covers to the chassis with the screws removed earlier and tighten them firmly 4 Connect all external cables and the AC power cord s to the system continued Appendix C Warnings WARNING English continued A microprocessor and heat sink may be hot if the system has been running Also there may be sharp pins and edges on some board and chassis parts Contact should be made with care Consider
22. 3 3V MD 38 3 3V MD 42 3 3V MD 47 3 3V MD 52 3 3V DVALID 3 3V MD 57 3 3V MD 60 3 3V MD 64 3 3V MD 68 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 12C_BMC_SCL 3 3V 12C_BMC_SDA 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V BANK1 3 3V CSTB 3 3V MA 2 3 3V MA 6 3 3V MA 11 3 3V continued 179 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 180 Memory Board 1 amp 2 Interface Connector J6 amp J7 continued Signals Pins A B C D 38 1 5V 3 3V TMS GND 39 GND GND 1 5V TRST 40 SPARECLKO GND TDI GND 41 GND GND 1 5V TCK 42 MD 0 3 3V MD 1 GND 43 GND MD 3 GND MD 4 44 MD 5 3 3V DSTBNO GND 45 GND MD 7 GND MD 8 46 MD 9 3 3V DSTBPO GND 47 GND MD 11 GND MD 12 48 MD 13 3 3V MD 14 GND 49 GND DOFF1 GND DOFFO 50 MD 16 3 3V DSEL GND 51 GND GND 1 5V MD 17 52 MUXCLKO GND MD 18 GND 53 GND GND 1 5V MD 20 54 MD 21 3 3V MD 22 GND 55 GND MD 24 GND MD 25 56 MD 26 3 3V DSTBP1 GND 57 GND MD 28 GND MD 29 58 GDCMPLT 3 3V DSTBN1 GND 59 GND MD 31 GND MD 32 60 MD 33 3 3V MD 34 GND E 3 3V 3 3V TDO 3 3V MD 2 3 3V MD 6 3 3V MD 10 3 3V MD 15 3 3V MRESET 3 3V MD 19 3 3V MD 23 3 3V MD 27 3 3V MD 30 3 3V MD 35 Chapter 15 Midplane Description Voltages Power Supply Connectors J8 J9 amp J10 Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description 1 VCC12 19 VCC12 37 VCC12 2 VCC12 20 VCC
23. 79 EMP Console Access Modes Server not configured for console redirection 80 onfiguration Jumpers J2C1 issu 194 J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management nennen 220 J31 Jumpers for BUS ch asien 221 Memory Module DIMM Support nn 234 Power Supply AG Input ne EE 252 Power Supply Output Ratings EE 252 Server Board Set Voltages and Currents AAA 253 Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage 254 Total Combined Power Used by Your Server 255 Fan Speed Controle EI 278 XV Part I User s Guide Introduction to the High performance Server On site Installation Installing the Server Power on Self Test Description Running Setup Utility When to Run System Setup Utility When to Run SCSI Configuration Utility Emergency Management Port Console How to Use FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run ON OO Oo F WO N Hot swappable Fans Hot Swapping 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping 11 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping Introduction to the High performance Server The modular scaleable architecture of your high performance rack server supports symmetrical multiprocessing SMP and a variety of operating systems The server comes with Peripheral Component Interconnect PCI and Industry Standard Architecture ISA buses The server board set consists of eight individual boards e CPU baseboard e Two memory modules e Front side bus terminator module e P
24. P2X2 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P2X3 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P1X1 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P1X2 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P1X3 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P2X1 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P2X2 GND GND 12V 5V 5V P2X3 GND GND 12V 5V 5V 178 Chapter 15 Midplane Description Voltages Memory Board 1 amp 2 Interface Connector J6 amp J7 Pins 0 JO Om SS WN Ow WWW WW DID DIN DD MM MM mn gt gt ch 7 2 NI RO N 0 0 AN DO TF Go NM gt OO OAN DO A FW MYM O A GND GDCMPLT GND MD 41 GND MD 45 GND MD 50 GND DCMPLT GND MUXCLK1 GND MD 59 GND MD 63 GND 1 5V GND MD 71 GND 3 3V GND SPARECLK1 GND 1 5V GND CMNDO GND 1 5V GND RCGCLK GND MA 4 GND MA 9 GND B MD 36 3 3V MD 39 3 3V MD 43 3 3V MD 48 3 3V MD 53 3 3V GND GND GND 3 3V MD 61 3 3V MD 65 3 3V MD 69 3 3V 3 3V GND GND GND 3 3V CARD 3 3V BANK2 3 3V GND GND GND 3 3V MA 7 3 3V MA 12 Signals Cc GND DSTBN2 GND DSTBP2 GND MD 46 GND MD 51 GND MD 54 1 5V MD 56 1 5V DSTBP3 GND DSTBN3 GND MD 67 GND 3 3V GND CARD_NUM 1 5V PHIT 1 5V RCMPLT GND BANKO GND ROW 1 5V MA 1 1 5V MA 5 GND MA 10 GND D MD 37 GND MD 40 GND MD 44 GND MD 49 GND WDEVT GND MD 55 GND MD 58 GND MD 62 GND MD 66 GND MD 70 GND GND PWRGD GND RHIT GND GRCMPLT GND CMND1 GND MA 0 GND MA 3 GND MA 8 GND MA 13 E
25. Power on Self Test Description Running Setup Utility When to Run System Setup Utility When to Run SCSI Configuration Utility Emergency Management Port Console How to Use FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run OO N OORA WO N Hot swappable Fans Hot Swapping 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping 11 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping Part Il Service Technician s Guide Safety Guidelines 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 14 Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing 15 Midplane Description Voltages 16 Peripheral Bay Backplane Description 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages 23 Front Panel Description Voltages 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Description A Regulatory Specifications B Equipment Log C Warnings Conventions A WARNING WARNING indicates a hazard that can cause personal injury or equipment damage if the hazard is not avoided CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazard that might cause personal injury damage to hardware or software if the hazard is not avoided gt NOTE Notes
26. SCSI drive active 106 drive failure 106 drive present 106 Drivers SCSI installing 37 video installing 37 Drives CD ROM 168 diskette 165 E EDO DRAM array 234 Electromagnetic compatibility See EMC EMC compatibility 285 notice of test and compliance international 286 Emergency Management Port FRU viewer 88 main console window 82 phonebook 87 requirements 80 server control operations 84 EMI 18 Environmental specifications 30 Equipment log 97 101 109 119 127 165 257 287 Error messages beep codes 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 port 80h codes 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 POST error codes 273 ESD 30 146 add in boards 146 Expansion slots 186 16 bit ISA 20 32 bit PCI 20 64 bit PCI 20 F fan failure LED 98 hot swapping 98 redundant 98 removing 97 replacing 100 fan array housing reinstalling 128 removing 128 Fans 18 98 voltage settings 278 FCC Class A 286 Features server 18 19 20 Front bezel reinstalling 121 removing 121 Front panel board 19 reinstalling 143 removing 142 controller 191 switches 19 34 Front side bus 219 terminator module 20 219 reinstalling 135 removing 135 FRUSDR load utility when to run 89 H Hard disk drive hot swapping SCSI drive 106 installing in hot docking bay 104 SCSI 102 hard drives SCSI hot docking 24 Hot docking bay status indicators 106 Hot swap controller 191 Hot swapping hard disk dri
27. The disk backplane provides an independent SCSI channel two SCA 2 connectors for SCA type SCSI hard disk drives active terminators that terminate the backplane end of the SCSI bus SCSI 3 compliant power control for each drive that automatically powers down a slot when a drive failure is detected and reported or a drive is removed when a new drive is inserted the power control waits a few moments and then applies power to the new drive e three light emitting diodes LEDs for each drive power LEDs indicate the drives are receiving power activity LEDs indicate the drives are being accessed drive fault LEDs indicate the failure status of each drive during server initialization they flash for one second intrachassis DC bus PC bus temperature sensor for each microcontroller interchassis IC bus support per SAF TE specification serial EEPROM for nonvolatile information storage The SCA 2 connectors on the disk backplane provide control signals and power for up to two wide fast 3 5 inch SCA type SCSI hard disk drives The backplane receives control signals from a Symbios 53C896 host adapter on the PHP I O baseboard The fault indicator LEDs on the front panel indicate failure status for each drive in the hot docking bays These indicators get their signals through a cable connected to the front panel connector on the disk backplane The temperature sensor on the disk backplane provides temperature information to other de
28. Wide Fast 16 bit SCSI ROM EEN 209 IDE eA an E ata ae 210 C Feature Connector een 210 Eed EE 211 FrontPanel ele Lu 211 A o 212 USB Pollas ies 212 Keyboard and Mouse EE 213 TEE ee eg 213 TE EE 214 end Egeter 214 NORA NICE ee NEE 215 Contents 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Varnings and CALAS scan Eeer th nie tea Eege 217 GPU Baseboard Features 22 dee ect hed e fel ea nett Genee EE EE ue AEN 217 POCOS ua 217 Memory le EE 218 DC to DC Voltage Converters ss 218 PONTS as Ce Nr en een e e O 219 FRONT Side EE 219 Front Side Bus Terminator Module 219 CPU Baseboard Configuration JUMPLS visir is 220 Changing a Jumper Setting tesis een ea 221 GPU Baseboard Layouts nee antenne 222 CPU Baseboard Connectors iia ai nan heart inertie 223 Memory Connectors J23 and J20 Rows A B and C ssssssssssessnnnnnnnnnnnnnneeeeneennneeene 223 VOD A eet eat Mins on ele eee a ee ee 226 Pete Fee deed casita 229 Front Panel Conector 2 SEA 230 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory Warning S ANACO eii te 233 Module Features cetreria ati een 233 EDO DRAMAS AY sia pias 234 Memory Mee ler Eegenen nee tac AE en EEE 239 Instaling DIMMS 22a A ee en see con 240 Removing DIMMS wc 242 System Management Interface 243 Memory Module Connector nn 244 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Warnings ANOS QUE ONG dE EE EE E E A 249 AC Input e EE 249 Jumper JP1 Installing Removing
29. character in the same field will have a wraparound problem Preboot Only EMP enabled during power down or POST Always Active EMP always enabled Disabled EMP disabled When enabled power down front panel NMI and reset control via EMP are disabled Restricted mode can be selected with preboot or always active You can connect directly to the port or use a modem 53 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Boot Menu 54 Feature Diskette Check Boot Device Priority Hard Drive Removable Devices Maximum Number of 120 Drives Message Timeout Multiplier Pause During Post Option Disabled Enabled Diskette Drive 2 Removable Devices 3 Hard Drive 4 ATAPI CD ROM Drive Disabled Enabled Description Enabled verifies the diskette type on boot Disabled speeds up the boot process Select the search order for the types of boot devices Use the up and down arrow keys to select a device Press lt gt to move it up the list and press lt gt to move it down the list Press lt Esc gt to exit this menu The system attempts to boot to the OS from the first hard drive in this list If it does not find an OS the system tries the next drive listed until if finds an OS Use the up and down arrow keys to select a device Press lt gt to move it up the list and press lt gt to move it down the list Press lt Esc gt to exit this menu The OS assigns drive letters to th
30. location Reinstall the top and right side covers Plug in the power cord turn on the server and wait for POST to complete See Chapter 3 Power on Self Test Description Running Run the SSU to reconfigure your server See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run 221 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide CPU Baseboard Layout 222 A o EE ws H OM07312 Figure 18 2 CPU Baseboard Layout J31 Jumper block J3 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 2 processor core power only J1 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 1 processor core power only J2 VRM connector provides power for processor slots 1 and 2 L2 cache power only J5 VRM connector provides power for processor slots 3 and 4 L2 cache power only Memory interface connectors I O connector Power connectors J4 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 3 processor core power only J6 VRM connector provides power for processor slot 4 processor core power only Processor slot 4 Processor slot 3 Processor slot 2 Processor slot 1 J32 Front panel connector Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers CPU Baseboard Connectors Memory Connectors J23 and J20 Rows A
31. preassigned tasks Distributing the processing loads among processors increases server performance This is particularly useful when application demand is low and the I O request load is high In an SMP environment the processors share a common bus the same interrupt structure and access to common memory and I O channels The SMP implementation conforms to the Multiprocessor Specification Version 1 4 The onboard PCI and memory controller PMC supports from 128 MB to 8 GB of ECC memory either fast page mode FPM or extended data out EDO 3 3 V 50 or 60 ns DRAMs mounted on JEDEC DIMMs Processors The processor core and L2 cache components are mounted inside the S E C cartridge It plugs into one of the four Slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard 217 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Memory Interface The memory subsystem consists of two memory modules installed in the two memory connectors on the midplane The memory modules interface with the CPU baseboard through the midplane via the grand connector The grand connector provides connectivity between the CPU baseboard the PHP I O baseboard and memory modules through two 270 pin connectors and one 240 pin connector Each memory module contains sixteen 72 bit wide DIMM sockets that can provide up to 4 GB of EDO memory per module The memory bus uses gunning transceiver logic AGTL signaling technology Because the bus must be terminated on each end both memory connecto
32. provides a path for management information via SCSI retrieves drive fault status backplane temperature and fan failure information via the IPMB queries the status of the front panel controller for power supply information controls drive power on and power down facilitating hot swapping 191 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide I O Riser Card 192 The I O riser card contains all the legacy I O connections such as video keyboard mouse etc The card plugs into the legacy connector on the PHP I O baseboard and provides the following external connectors e PS 2 compatible keyboard interchangeable with the mouse e PS 2 compatible mouse interchangeable with the keyboard e parallel port e two serial ports e VGA video port e ICMB connector interface OM08099 Figure 17 1 I O Riser Card gt I O riser card USB connectors mounted on PHP 1 0 baseboard Parallel port Video port Serial port 2 Serial port 1 Keyboard port Mouse port ICMB connector ronmmoog Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers PHP 1 0 Baseboard Configuration Jumpers You can use the configuration jumpers on the PHP I O baseboard to recover a BIOS clear a CMOS password or clear all CMOS settings Figure 17 2 shows the jumper positions for the default system configuration The reserved pins may not be populated in shipping configurations Table 17 1 shows the minimum default configurations in bold
33. syst me en l absence des panneaux risque d endommager ses pi ces Pour installer les panneaux proc dez comme suit 1 Assurez vous de ne pas avoir oubli d outils ou de pi ces d mont es dans le syst me 2 Assurez vous que les c bles les cartes d extension et les autres composants sont bien install s 3 Revissez solidement les panneaux du bo tier avec les vis retir es plus t t 4 Rebranchez tous les cordons d alimentation c a et c bles externes au syst me suite Appendix C Warnings AVERTISSEMENT Francais suite Le microprocesseur et le dissipateur de chaleur peuvent tre chauds si le systeme a t sous tension Faites galement attention aux broches aigu s des cartes et aux bords tranchants du capot Nous vous recommandons l usage de gants de protection Danger d explosion si la batterie n est pas remont e correctement Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du m me type ou d un type quivalent recommand par le fabricant Disposez des piles us es selon les instructions du fabricant Le systeme a t concu pour fonctionner dans un cadre de travail normal L emplacement choisi doit tre e Propre et d pourvu de poussi re en suspension sauf la poussi re normale e Bien a r et loin des sources de chaleur y compris du soleil direct e A l abri des chocs et des sources de vibrations e isol de forts champs lectromagn tiques g en r s par des appareils
34. 1 0 Baseboard ccoooooccocccccccccccononccononcccnannnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 156 le ere 158 Removing the Midplane ste deis dante de aida ennn 158 Reinstalling the Mid plane u use 158 AG Piller ANd Ree 158 Removing the AC Filter and Cable 158 Reinstalling the AC Filter and Cable AAA 159 Petipheral Bay ia EE 159 Removing the Peripheral Bay inne ei 159 Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay cocina ra GEESS 159 Peripheral Bay Backplane ac ee e EE Ee EEN eee Reste 160 Removing the Peripheral Bay Backpolane AA 160 Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Backplane 161 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board 162 Removing the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board 162 Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board 162 14 Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing Warnings and Cautions iii 165 Tools and Supplies You Need WEE 165 ste ele Ee El EE 165 Diskette Drives ne BR Seegen Reken 165 Removing the Diskette Drive un eek 166 Replacing the Diskette Drive ss 166 BD ROMIDINS a er ae Eegen 168 Removing the CD ROM Driver ee 168 Replacing the CD ROM Drive is 170 15 Midplane Description Voltages Elle ee EE 171 Midplane EE 171 Dei 171 Detection SIG a TEE 172 VW QUICK EE en EE 172 Midplane CONNECT Sd ta 173 Grand CONNECTION tennis ent Rene 174 Grand Connector Power Module 1 Connector JD 177 Grand Connector Power Module 2 Connector J5
35. 24 28 2A 2C 2E 30 32 34 35 36 Beeps 1 2 2 3 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 4 1 1 3 4 3 1 4 1 1 Reason Verify real mode Get processor type Initialize system hardware Initialize chip set registers with initial POST values Set in POST flag Initialize processor registers Enable processor cache Initialize caches to initial POST values Initialize I O Initialize the local bus IDE Initialize Power Management Load alternate registers with initial new POST values Restore processor control word during warm boot Initialize keyboard controller BIOS ROM checksum Initialize 8254 timer Initialize 8237 DMA controller Reset Programmable Interrupt Controller Test DRAM refresh Test 8742 Keyboard Controller Set ES segment register to 4 GB Autosize DRAM Clear 512K base RAM RAM failure on address line xxxx RAM failure on data bits xxxx of low byte of memory bus RAM failure on data bits xxxx of high byte of memory bus Test processor bus clock frequency Test CMOS RAM initialize alternate chip set registers Warm start shutdown continued Port 80h Codes continued Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages CP 37 38 39 3A 3C 3D 40 42 44 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4E 50 52 54 56 58 5A 56 60 62 64 66 68 6A 6C 6E 70 72 74 76 7A ZC 7E Beeps 2 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 Reason Reinitialize the chip set MB only Shadow system BIOS ROM Reinitialize the cach
36. 3 Installing a Hard Disk Drive A Drive carrier latch B Drive carrier handle C Hot docking bay guide rails 3 If you installed a RAID controller board in your server run the Disk Array Controller Configuration utility supplied with the board See the manufacturer s documentation provided with the board 105 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Hot swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive Status LEDs are arranged in sets of three below each of the 2 hot docking bays They monitor the status of each drive When a yellow LED is on continuously it is okay to hot swap remove and replace a bad drive with a good one You do not need to shut the server down to hot swap a drive SCSI Drive Status LED Descriptions SCSI drive SCSI drive power on active green LED green LED E On Off 0 On Blinking Off Off 0 O On Off Off Off See 1 2 SCSI drive faulty yellow LED Off Off On Slow blinking ON 0 Off Description and action if needed Drive is present with power Drive is present with power and is being accessed Drive CAN be replaced Steady yellow fault light indicates drive has a problem Power to drive is off Drive SHOULD NOT be replaced at this time A slowly blinking yellow fault light indicates that a drive that has just been replaced is in recovery mode drive array being rebuilt Power to drive is on There is no drive installed in the bay The hot swap controlle
37. 6136648K Extended Memory Passed 512K Cache SRAM Passed ATAPI CD ROM HITACHI CDR 8335 Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP LINE Direct MODE Redirect LINE STATUS Connected Figure 7 2 EMP Console in Redirect State Figure 7 2 shows the EMP Console window in redirect mode with the terminal window The text that appears on the server monitor displays in the Redirect window Availability of the various EMP Console features are determined by two factors the BIOS EMP access mode and whether the server s COM 2 port is configured for console redirection The three EMP access modes are disabled pre boot and always active Table 7 1 EMP Console Access Modes Server configured for console redirection Mode Server is powered off During POST After OS boots Disabled Redirect window appears Redirect window Redirect window but is blank Pre boot EMP commands available Redirect window Redirect window Always Active EMP commands available Redirect window EMP commands available The operation mode can be modified by selections in the Reset and Power on off dialogs These are server control dialogs available in EMP Console 79 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Table 7 2 EMP Console Access Modes Server not configured for console redirection Mode Server is powered off During POST After OS boots Disabled Redirect window appears Redirect window appears Redirect window appears but is blank but is blank but is blank Pre
38. 8181 8182 8200 8201 8203 8204 Error message Processor 2 disabled Processor 3 disabled Processor 1 failed initialization Processor 2 failed initialization Processor 3 failed initialization NVRAM cleared by jumper ESCD data cleared Password cleared by jumper Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 1 Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 2 Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 3 Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 4 Processor 1 L2 cache failed Processor 2 L2 cache failed Processor 3 L2 cache failed Processor 4 L2 cache failed BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 1 BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 2 BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 3 BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 4 PXB1 failed to respond Mismatch among processors detected L2 cache size mismatch Baseboard management controller failed to function Front panel controller failed to function Primary hot swap controller failed to function Secondary hot swap controller failed to function 23 Front Panel Description Voltages This chapter describes the front panel Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Front Panel Board The front panel board provides the user interface to the server T
39. A Power switch B Reset switch C NMI switch D Power LED green E Power fault LED yellow Description When pressed it turns on or off the DC power inside the server When pressed it resets the server and causes the power on self test POST to run When pressed it causes a nonmaskable interrupt This switch is recessed behind the front panel to prevent inadvertent activation It must be pressed with a narrow non conductive tool not supplied When lit continuously it indicates the presence of DC power in the server It goes out when the power is turned off or the power source is disrupted When lit continuously it indicates a power supply failure When lit it indicates a fan failure has been detected in the server When lit continuously it indicates an asserted fault status on one or more hard disk drives in the hot docking bay When flashing it indicates drive reset in progress It displays information about processor type and failure codes Two SCSI hot docking bays for 3 5 inch x 1 0 inch or 1 6 inch SCSI hard drives When lit continuously it indicates an asserted fault status on one or more hard disk drives in the hot docking bay When flashing it indicates drive reset in progress When flashing it indicates drive activity When lit continuously it indicates the presence of the drive and power on the drive When pressed it opens or closes the CD tray When lit it indicates the drive is in use It
40. Backplane See Figure 13 19 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove Peripheral Bay as described earlier Tag and disconnect power and signal cable to the diskette drive and CD ROM drive Remove and save eight securing screws and remove backplane from peripheral bay Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper H DE eg 160 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Backplane See Figure 13 19 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one 3 Position and align the board over the two alignment pins 4 Reinstall the eight securing screws removed earlier 5 Reinstall the peripheral bay as described earlier OM07355 Figure 13 19 Peripheral Bay Backplane A Snap on standoffs two B Screws eight 161 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Removing the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board a NEN DE Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remo
41. ER Er pct Boot Without A on wee tea misao ea teed aoe er Rae Locked Power and Reset Gwitches nennen nennen RINNEN Video Ee ln EE Emergency Management Port EMP au as au da das 2 On site Installation Installing the Server Selecting ES LE a eee ea E Ea RA E Aa ea aina eE EEEa PERNA Physical Sp cificationS sisin eae e ek Envir rimental Speeilieali ns e ebe ed ebe Rilke After Unpacking the Server ices cha weds ege Ego eege ae ata ec Connecting Peripheral Devices sis Obtaining a eet Turning on Your Server TRS a se a a aa ne ee eee eee AUN a POWer n sell EE Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes ern lie Be E EE ele RRE server Won t Boot From the CD fice nase ae ee ER NEECEe En 3 Power on Self Test Description Running Power on Self Test POST il 4 Setup Utility When to Run When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility EE R ning the Set p Use ee ira Mal MONS ed nee nent e tnt senti dos AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide vi Advanced MONO EE Security MON EE EE EE BOOP MENU nen en een ae een anne Exit Menu Selections ooccccoccccnccncccncncnnnccnonancnnncnnnncnnn narco nono ncnnn cnn naa nnnnanan nn cnn nnancnnanines System Setup Utility When to Run When to Run the System Setup Utility se What You Need iiO AR EE o EE Startingthe So TEE CUSTOMIZING the SSU E Launchng a Task ere sons ege a NEES Resource Configuration Add in RCA Wmdow cnn O
42. EXE file to the diskette mi gt NOTE If the extracted files do not include the BI0s EXE file you must extract the BIOS update file directly to the bootable diskette in drive A Example type 10006B11 A and press lt Enter gt Running the BIOS Update Utility 196 Remember to write down the current BIOS settings before running the BIOS update utility 1 Observe the precautions on page 111 Safety Guidelines 2 Insert the update diskette into drive A and turn on the monitor and server When the server boots from the diskette follow the screen prompts If you choose option 1 the server will automatically reboot after the update process completes so that the changes will take effect Remove the diskette when the server starts to boot If you choose option 2 you must reboot the server by pressing reset or lt Enter gt after the update process completes for the changes to take effect Remove the diskette when the server starts to boot 3 As the server boots check the BIOS identifier version number to make sure the update was successful Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers When the following message appears press lt F2 gt Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP After entering Setup press lt F9 gt to load Setup defaults then press lt Enter gt to confirm Set the Setup options to the settings you wrote down before updating the BIOS
43. I SOR Launches the SDR Viewer not available on AC450NX servers n FEU Launches the FRU Viewer sl Displays the Phonebook Dialog Displays the online help a Status Bar 82 The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the main window It contains the following status information SERVER NAME the name of the connected server when connecting via modem LINE the type of line connection This is either direct or modem MODE either Redirect of EMP depending on whether the EMP has control of the COM 2 port LINE STATUS gives status information about the server connection For example if a server is connected the status bar says Connected Otherwise the line is blank Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use EMP Console Main Menu e File Exit Exits EMP Console e Connect Disconnect disconnects the server connection Re Connect displays the connect dialog A list of the five most recent modem connections Click on one of these server names to initiate a connection e Action Power On Off displays the Power on off dialog Reset displays the Reset dialog SEL Viewer displays the SEL Viewer not available on AC450NX servers SDR Viewer displays the SDR Viewer not available on AC450NX servers FRU Viewer displays the FRU Viewer Phonebook displays the Phonebook dialog e Help Help Topics help topics for EMP Console Help About provi
44. Is the diskette drive properly configured Coco Is the diskette drive activity light always on If so the signal cable may be plugged in incorrectly If you are using the onboard diskette controller use the SSU to make sure that controller is enabled If you are using an add in diskette controller make sure that the onboard controller is disabled Chapter 5 If the problem persists there may be a problem with the diskette drive PHP I O baseboard or drive signal cable Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light 268 If you have installed one or more hard disk drives in your server check the following Q Are the power and signal cables to the IDE hard disk drive properly installed Q Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the hard disk drive and controller board set correctly Q Is the onboard IDE controller enabled NOTE The hard disk drive activity light on the front panel lights when either an IDE hard disk drive or SCSI device is in use Q Is the hard disk drive properly configured Q Are the SCSI signal cables properly connected to the peripheral bay backplane If you received error messages refer to Error Codes and Messages on page 269 for information about error messages If you did not receive error messages run the SSU and make sure the hard disk drive is configured with the correct parameters Chapter 5 If the problem persi
45. SEL_L GND 28 55 56 62 C D_L GND 29 57 58 63 REQ_L GND 30 59 60 64 VO_L GND 31 61 62 65 DB8_L GND 32 63 64 66 DB9_L GND 33 65 66 67 DB10_L GND 34 67 68 68 DB11_L 209 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide IDE Port Pin Signal 1 RSTDRV 3 DD7 5 DD6 7 DD5 9 DD4 11 DD3 13 DD2 15 DD1 17 DDO 19 GND 21 DRQ 23 DIOW 25 DIOR 27 IORDY 29 DACK 31 IRQ 33 DA1 35 DAO 37 CS1P_L 39 DHACT_L 12C Feature Connector Pin Name Pin Name 1 SMI 2 l2CCLK 3 CONP 4 key 5 PWROFF 6 I2CDATA 7 LPOK 8 KEYUNLK 9 NMI 10 HostAUX 11 RESET 12 GND 13 GND 14 key 15 SECURE 16 GND 17 INTRUD 18 NMI_L 19 INIT_L 20 GND 21 KB_DATA 22 MS_DATA 23 KB_CLK 24 MS_CLK 25 Key 26 RESET_BMC_L 210 Pin 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Signal GND Ground DD8 DD9 DD10 DD11 DD12 DD13 DD14 DD15 KEY PIN GND GND GND CSEL GND No connection No connection DA2 DS3P_L GND 12 Connector Pin Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Signal CLK GND DATA Front Panel Connector Pin Nao Kei 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 Signal GND Ground VCC_STDBY ISP_SCLK ISP_SDI ISP_FPC_EN_L ISP_MODE ISP_FPC_SDO VCC_STDBY GND COM2_TO_FP_EN COM2_TO_SIO_EN_A XIMB_SOUT_EN VCC_STDBY RESERVED SIN_TTL_COM2 SIN_TTL_XIMB SOUT_TTL_COM2 SOUT_TTL_XIMB RESERVED GND
46. SMIs System Event Logging Clear Event Log Assert NMI on AERR Assert NMI on BERR Assert NMI on PERR Assert NMI on SERR Enable Host Bus Error Server Management Information Board Part Number Board Serial Number System Part Number System Serial Number Chassis Part Number Chassis Serial Number BMC Revision FPC Revision Primary HSBP Revision Secondary HSBP Revision Console Redirection COM Port Address IRQ 52 Option Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 3F8 2F8 3E8 None Description An additional setup menu for changing server management features Disabled turns off all firmware SMI sources Enabled logs critical system events Enabled cleans the system event log Enabled generates an NMI Enabling the Firmware SMIs option is required to assert an NMI Enabled generates an NMI Enabling the Firmware SMIs option is required to assert an NMI Enabled generates an NMI Enabling the SERR option is required to activate this option Enabled generates an NMI Enables host single and multi bit errors Displays system serial number part number and server management controller revisions All items on this menu cannot be modified in user mode If any items require changes please consult your system administrator Information only Information only Inf
47. Self Test POST A WARNING The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and POST starts running It checks the PHP I O baseboard CPU baseboard keyboard and most installed peripheral devices During the memory test POST displays the amount of memory that it is able to access and test Depending on the amount of memory installed on the memory module it may take several minutes to complete the memory test Turn on your video monitor and server After a few seconds the power on self test POST begins You can enter Setup when POST displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP If you press lt F2 gt follow the instructions on the monitor when Setup appears gt NOTE Because POST must complete test and initialization functions after pressing lt F2 gt a few seconds may pass before entering Setup If you do not press lt F2 gt POST continues During boot the server recognizes and displays the BIOS banner for the onboard S153C896 SCSI host adapter on the PHP I O baseboard When the BIOS banner for the SCSI host adapter appears you can run the included SCSI configuration utility by pressing lt Ctrl C gt when this message appears Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt To Enter Co
48. Setting Configuration Jumpers VGA Video Port 5 1 15 11 OM00936A Pin Signal 1 Red analog color signal R 2 Green analog color signal G 3 Blue analog color signal B 4 No connection 5 GND video ground shield 6 8 GND video ground shield 9 No connection 10 GND video ground 11 12 No connection 13 HSYNC horizontal sync 14 VSYNC vertical sync 15 No connection 215 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers This chapter describes the CPU baseboard and tells how to use the jumpers Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 CPU Baseboard Features The CPU baseboard interfaces with the PHP I O baseboard and memory modules through the midplane The CPU baseboard provides e four Slot 2 type connectors for processors packaged in Single Edge Contact S E C cartridges e an onboard DC to DC converter that supplies V voltage for the CPU baseboard and memory modules e four sockets for VRM8 3 converters that supply core voltage for the processors e two sockets for VRM8 3 converters that supply L2 cache voltage for the processors e I2C serial peripheral interface SPI and in system programming ISP server management interfaces In a symmetric multiprocessor SMP environment all processors are equal and have no
49. Setup Utility When to Run Updating BMC FPC and HCS Firmware For a copy of the latest BMC FPC and HSC firmware releases contact your dealer or sales representative Before you can update the firmware from the firmware update diskettes you must make them MS DOS bootable You must have MS DOS version 6 00 or greater installed on CADOS gt NOTE 198 Please review the firmware release notes distributed with the firmware update package before attempting to update the firmware of any microcontroller Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Boot Sequence The PHP I O baseboard provides the server with a variety of methods for detecting and booting an operating system The BIOS scans devices and user configurable option slots in a specific sequence Knowing the precise sequence the BIOS detects sets up and boots assists in defining the server configuration Location J1E2 J3B1 J1G2 P1 J2G1 P2 U4G1 U3D1 P3 P4 P5 P6 U7E2 P7 P8 P9 P10 Bus ISA ISA IDE Primary PCI Primary PCI Primary PCI Primary PCI Primary PCI Secondary PCI Secondary PCI Secondary PCI Secondary PCI Secondary PCI 64 Bit PCI 64 Bit PCI 64 Bit PCI 64 Bit PCI IDSEL None None None 25 26 27 28 31 20 21 22 23 25 20 21 22 23 Comment Floppy Drive Compatibility Legacy Boot Slot 1 Primary IDE Expansion Slot On board SCSI Expansion Slot On board Video PIIX4 Compo
50. System in Betrieb ist Au erdem k nnen einige Platinen und Geh useteile scharfe Spitzen und Kanten aufweisen Arbeiten an Platinen und Geh use sollten vorsichtig ausgef hrt werden Sie sollten Schutzhandschuhe tragen Bei falschem Einsetzen einer neuen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr Die Batterie darf nur durch denselben oder einen entsprechenden vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp ersetzt werden Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien den Anweisungen des Herstellers entsprechend Das System wurde f r den Betrieb in einer normalen B roumgebung entwickelt Der Standort sollte e sauber und staubfrei sein Hausstaub ausgenommen e gut gel ftet und keinen Heizquellen ausgesetzt sein einschlie lich direkter Sonneneinstrahlung e kenen Ersch tterungen ausgesetzt sein e keine starken von elektrischen Ger ten erzeugten elektromagnetischen Felder aufweisen e in Regionen in denen elektrische St rme auftreten mit einem berspannungsschutzger t verbunden sein w hrend eines elektrischen Sturms sollte keine Verbindung der Telekommunikationsleitungen mit dem Modem bestehen e mit einer geerdeten Wechselstromsteckdose ausger stet sein e Uber ausreichend Platz verf gen um Zugang zu den Netzkabeln zu gew hrleisten da der Stromanschlu des Produkts haupts chlich ber die Kabel unterbrochen wird 295 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide AVVERTENZA Italiano 296
51. Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets 3 Remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 4 Move the jumper on J2C1 from pins 5 B C to pins 5 A B Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 6 Turn on the server and wait for POST to complete This automatically restores CMOS and RTC to Setup default values See Chapter 3 Power on Self Test Description Running 7 Turn off the server unplug the power cords and remove the top and right side covers 8 Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 5 A B to pins 5 B C 9 Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 10 Run the SSU to configure your server See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run i Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Clearing the Password The jumper on J2C1 pins 6 B C protects the CMOS password during server reset Moving the jumper to pins 6 A B clears the password during server reset To clear the CMOS password 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets 3 Remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 4 Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 6 B C to pins 6 A B Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 6 Turn on the serve
52. and the boot sequence They also control disabling writes to the diskette drive in secure mode You can use the SSU to select each boot device The default boot sequence is diskette hard disk CD ROM and Network 26 Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Boot Without Keyboard The server can boot with or without a keyboard Before it boots the BIOS displays a message about the keyboard stating whether or not it detects one During POST the BIOS automatically detects and tests the keyboard if it is present Locked Power and Reset Switches The power and reset push button switches on the front panel are locked when the server is in the secure mode To exit from the secure mode you must enter your user password Diskette Write Protect If Diskette Write Protect is enabled in Setup it write protects the diskette drive only while the server is in the secure mode To exit from the secure mode you must enter your user password Video Blanking If Video Blanking is enabled in Setup the video display will be off when the server is in the secure mode To exit from the secure mode you must enter your user password Emergency Management Port EMP The Emergency Management Port EMP is a feature of Server Management EMP lets the Front Panel Controller FPC communicate with a EMP console via the serial port even if the server power is off To enable this feature in the flash resident Setup an administrator must enter a
53. boot EMP commands available EMP commands available Redirect window appears but is blank Always Active EMP commands available EMP commands available EMP commands available Requirements 80 This section outlines the requirements and configurations necessary for using EMP Console Operating Systems e Windows 95 16MB of RAM 32 MB recommended 20 MB disk space e Windows NT Windows NT 4 0 24 MB of RAM 32 MB recommended 20 MB disk space Client Configuration EMP Console supports all COM ports on the client system along with any Windows NT 95 compatible modem Server Configuration EMP Console requires the server s COM 2 port to be connected to an external modem or directly connected to a serial cable Direct Connect Configuration A null modem serial cable is needed Connect one end of the cable to the COM 2 port of server and the other to a port on the client machine Modem Configuration On the client EMP Console uses the Windows Application Program Interface API to determine if a modem is connected and available The EMP Console does not configure the modem it should be preconfigured through Windows For modem support the server must use a Hayes compatible modem that supports a baud rate of 19 2k The modem must be on the NT Hardware Compatibility List provided by Microsoft The server modem must be set in auto answer mode for EMP Console to be able to connect to it Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port C
54. buses server management signals front panel signals and legacy signals The expander buses provide source synchronous high speed bidirectional point to point links between the CPU baseboard and the PHP I O baseboard Each expander bus has enough bandwidth for two 32 bit 33 MHz PCI buses or one 64 bit 33 MHz PCI bus The expander buses use AGTL signaling technology Front Side Bus The front side bus FSB is an ECC protected 64 bit bus that uses GTL signaling technology it runs at 100 MHz The FSB requires termination modules in each unused Slot 2 connector When installing processors always install them in sequence by starting with processor connector 1 then connector 2 and so on bottom connector to top connector For example in a dual processor server connectors 1 and 2 contain processors while connectors 3 and 4 contain terminator modules Front Side Bus Terminator Module The FSB terminator module provides e the necessary termination for the AGTL signals on the FSB e correct handling of JTAG scan signals 219 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide CPU Baseboard Configuration Jumpers The J31 jumper block e controls the VRMs and server management outputs e determines core to bus ratio e provides parking spaces for unused jumpers 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 e OOO 1 3 5 7 9 1113 15 E il Oe qu O Q SER
55. de una toma de tierra correctamente instalada e Provisto de espacio suficiente como para acceder a los cables de alimentaci n ya que stos hacen de medio principal de desconexi n del sistema 299 Index A AC filter and cable reinstalling 159 removing 158 Acoustic noise 30 Add in boards 146 current limitations 146 installing 146 ISA 57 146 148 installing 148 PCI 57 146 148 removing 149 Agency certification 285 286 B Back panel external connectors 32 Backplanes peripheral bay 183 Battery handling cautions 258 replacing 259 BIOS Setup utility description 43 Setup utility running 43 special recovery mode 197 updating 195 Board management controller 191 Board set CPU baseboard 17 I O baseboard 17 I O riser card 17 memory module 17 voltages and currents 253 brown out feature 249 C Cautions 132 137 143 146 156 CD ROM drive activity LED 24 headphone jack 24 mounting screws 170 open close button 24 removing 168 replacing 170 slide rails 170 volume control 24 Certifications 285 286 CFG files 58 Connecting peripheral devices 31 Connectors on CPU baseboard T O power section 204 229 Connectors on I O riser card keyboard and mouse ports 213 parallel port 214 serial ports 213 video port 215 Connectors on memory module signal section 244 Connectors on peripheral bay blindmate board blind mate 280 diskette drive 281 IDE 282 po
56. face type OM08476 Figure 17 2 J2C1 Configuration Jumper Block 193 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Table 17 1 Configuration Jumpers J2C1 Pins default in bold Function 1 B C Disable programming onboard programmable devices 1 A B Allow programming of onboard programmable devices 2 B C Normal boot 2 A B Boot Recovery BIOS 3 B C Reserved 3 A B Reserved 4 B C Allow BIOS flash update 4 A B Disable BIOS flash update 5 B C Do not clear CMOS 5 A B Clear CMOS 6 B C Do not clear password 6 A B Clear password 7 B C Do not override PHP switches 7 A B Override PHP switches 8 B C Disable I O SPI chain 8 A B Allow I O SPI chain Restoring CMOS to Default Values 194 The jumper on J2C1 pins 5 B C preserves the settings stored in CMOS nonvolatile memory NVRAM during server reset Moving the jumper to pins 5 A B clears CMOS and sets it and the real time clock RTC to the Setup default values during server reset To clear CMOS and restore the Setup default values 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2
57. in the text listing the option Menu Click On File Open FRU Save FRU Exit View FRU Info All FRU Areas By Device Type Settings Display HEX Display Verbose Output Text Output Binary Help About To Opens FRU data from a previously saved file Saves FRU data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format Quits the FRU Manager Displays FRU information of the selected device Displays FRU areas of all devices Displays FRU areas sorted by device type Displays FRU areas in Hex format Displays FRU areas in verbose format Saves FRU data in verbose format Saves FRU data in binary format Displays FRU Manager version information 73 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide nn BE FRU Common Header Area version 01h Internal Area Offset 01h Chassis Area Offset OEh Board Area Offset 12h Product Area Offset 1Ah PAD 00h PAD 00h Checksum C4h End of the Fields in Dislpay Internal Use Internal Information End of the Fields in Dislpay Chassis Area Chassis Information Area Version Chassis Type 11h Part Number ASCII SKCBS3501 Serial Number ASCII ge of the Fields in this Section this Section Area Area Version this Section TAT Setup Utility Mar Length 01h Length 01h Length 104 32 Figure 5 10 FRU Manager Main Window Exiting the SSU Exiting the SSU causes all windows to close 1 Exit the SSU by opening the menu bar item File in th
58. provide information and may be used to emphasize a recommended sequence of steps lt Fl gt A letter number symbol or word enclosed in lt gt represents a key on your keyboard For example the instruction press lt F1 gt means press the key labeled F1 on your keyboard lt Enter gt The lt Enter gt key is used to enter commands and responses to prompts Some manuals refer to lt Enter gt as RETURN CARRIAGE RETURN lt CR gt or use an arrow All of these terms are interchangeable lt x y gt Two or three key names separated by plus signs indicate multiple key entries For example lt Ctrl Alt Del gt means hold down lt Ctrl gt and lt Alt gt and press lt Del gt L In all tables in this guide active low signal names have an _L symbol following the name for example DSTBN3_L Active high signal names do not have a _L suffix Contents Quick Reference and Conventions For translated warnings see Appendix C Wammigs rreren Parti Users lge ess eh EE Part Il Service Technician s Guide GONVENLIONS HE Te a rt o A A E FAT MURS A anale Part I User s Guide 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Server DEE CHASSIS ict tees e ee Ak Eet Controls and INdiCatorS ooocccconcccnncnnnncncnnncanonanononoccnonancnnnannnnancnnncnnnona ranp Kaip cnnncnc ninas Server SECU ee ee Eeer ge Password Protect ugeduet eebe dE Secure Boot Models bee e o Boot S quence Controle ac er
59. selection is EMP active e Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action e Help displays the help information for this dialog 85 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Reset Selecting Reset from the Action menu displays the Reset dialog This dialog provides the ability to remotely reset the server with post reset options Operation Option Post reset option T System Reset EMP active Allow BIOS Re direct Cancel Help Figure 7 5 Reset Dialog Options available in the dialog are e System Reset resets the server with the selected post reset options This operation is not allowed if the server is configured in RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations e Post reset option sets the post reset option that will be in effect after reset The options are EMP active or BIOS redirection The default selection is EMP active e Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action e Help displays the help information for this dialog 86 Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use Phonebook EMP Console provides a support plug in known as Phonebook It stores names and numbers of servers in a list that can be updated by adding modifying or deleting entries Phonebook can be opened from the main menu and toolbar or launched from the Connect dialog by clicking the Config button Phonebook EX Server v Phone No Connect m Operation Cancel 1 New
60. supplies and midplane jumper JP1 is removed the system will automatically shutdown In a three power supply configuration a power supply can be swapped at any time Removing a Power Supply CAUTION If the chassis contains only two power supplies turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server Then turn off the server power with the push button on off switch on the front panel See Figures 11 1 1 2 3 4 110 Look at the yellow FAIL LEDs on the power supplies to determine which one is defective Pull the power supply handle down to unlock it from the chassis Pull the power supply toward you to unplug it Remove the defective power supply and set it aside Chapter 11 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping OM07324 Figure 11 1 Removing a Power Supply A Pull down handle B Remove power supply 111 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Replacing a Power Supply 112 See Figure 11 1 1 2 3 4 Remove the new power supply from the protective packaging Record the model and serial numbers of the power supply in your equipment log Slide the replacement power supply into the power supply cavity with the handle out After the power supply contacts the midplane lift the power supply handle to lock it into place Part Il Service Technician s Guide Safety Guidelines 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 14 Removabl
61. the BIOS e language section of the BIOS 195 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Recording the Current BIOS Settings Before updating the BIOS record your current BIOS settings You will need them to configure your server at the end of the update procedure 1 Turn on your video monitor and your server Each time you turn on or reboot your server POST begins and after a few seconds displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter Setup 2 After pressing F2 a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests and initialization functions When Setup is entered write down the current settings Creating the BIOS Update Diskette The BIOS update file is a compressed self extracting archive that contains the files you need to update the BIOS 1 Copy the BIOS update file to a temporary directory on your hard disk 2 From the C prompt change to the temporary directory 3 To extract the file type the name of the BIOS update file for example type 10006B11 EXE and press lt Enter gt The extracted files include e LICENSE TXT software license agreement e README TXT instructions for the BIOS update e BIOINSTR TXT instructions for creating a bootable diskette e B10S ExE BIOS update software 4 Insert the bootable diskette into drive A Change to the temporary directory that holds the Gros rop file 6 Type BIOs A and press lt Enter gt to extract the BIOS
62. the entries in the configuration file to probe the hardware and to select the proper SDRs to load into nonvolatile storage Displaying Utility Title and Version The utility displays its title FRU amp SDR Load Utility Version xx xx Configuration File The configuration file is in ASCII text The utility executes commands formed by the strings present in the configuration file These commands cause the utility to perform various tasks needed to ultimately load the proper SDRs into the nonvolatile storage of the BMC and possibly generic FRU devices Because some of the commands are interactive you are required to make a choice Prompting for Product Level FRU Information Through the use of a configuration file the utility may prompt the user for FRU information Filtering Sensor Data Record From the SDR File The MASTER SDR file has all the possible SDRs for the system These records may need to be filtered based on the current product configuration The configuration file directs the filtering of the SDRs Updating FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area After the configuration is determined the utility updates the FRU nonvolatile storage area First it verifies the Common Header area and checksum from the specified FRU file The Internal Use Area is read out of the specified FRU file and is programmed into the nonvolatile storage The Chassis Area is read out of the specified FRU file Last it reads the Product Area out of the specified F
63. trapezoidal 11 msec 2 0 g 11 msec 1 2 sine 0 to 3048 m 0 to 10000 ft Maximum ambient temperature is linearly derated between 1524 m 5000 ft and 3048 m 10000 ft by 1 C per 305 m 1000 ft lt 55dbA at ambient temperatures lt 28 C measured at bystander positions in operating mode lt 6 5 BA at ambient temperatures lt 28 C in operating mode Tested to 20 kilovolts kV no component damage CD ROM drive tested to 15 kV manufacturer s specification Two or three power supplies fully loaded 100 120 V 6 0 A 50 60 Hz 200 240 V 4 0 A 50 60 Hz Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server After Unpacking the Server Inspect the shipping box for evidence of mishandling during transit If the shipping box is damaged photograph it for reference After removing the contents keep the damaged box and the packing materials If the contents appear damaged file a damage claim with the carrier immediately Save the shipping boxes and packing materials to repackage the server in the event you decide to move it to another site Connecting Peripheral Devices CAUTION Before connecting peripheral devices to the server verify that the power cord is unplugged from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet Otherwise equipment damage can result Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server If your server normally ope
64. type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications continued 45 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 46 Main Menu continued Feature Type 32 bit I O Ultra DMA Mode Secondary Master Autotype Fixed Disk Type 32 bit I O Ultra DMA Mode Secondary Slave Autotype Fixed Disk Type 32 bit I O Ultra DMA Mode Processor Information Processor 1 Processor 1 Processor 2 Option User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Enabled Disabled None Press lt Enter gt User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Enabled Disabled None Press lt Enter gt User Auto 1 39 CD ROM ATAPI Removable Disabled Enabled Disabled Press lt Enter gt Description User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined
65. wearing protective gloves Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer Discard used batteries ac cording to manufacturer s instructions The system is designed to operate in a typical office environment Choose a site that is e Clean and free of airborne particles other than normal room dust e Well ventilated and away from sources of heat including direct sunlight e Away from sources of vibration or physical shock e Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices e In regions that are susceptible to electrical storms we recommend you plug your system into a surge suppresser and disconnect telecommunication lines to your modem during an electrical storm e Provided with a properly grounded wall outlet e Provided with sufficient space to access the power supply cords because they serve as the product s main power disconnect 291 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide AVERTISSEMENT Francais 292 Le bloc d alimentation de ce produit ne contient aucune pi ce pouvant tre r par e par l utilisateur Ce produit peut contenir plus d un bloc d alimentation Veuillez contacter un technicien qualifi en cas de probleme Ne pas essayer d utiliser ni modifier le cable d alimentation CA fourni s il ne correspond pas exact
66. x 864 94 5 67 5 75 Interlaced Mode 32K Direct Color 256 Color Mixed Mode Symbios 53C896 SCSI Controller A Symbios 53C896 LVDS SCSI controller provides embedded SCSI on the primary 32 bit PCI bus The configuration registers define PCI related parameters for the 53C896 device The 53C896 supports all mandatory registers in the PCI configuration space header including the vendor ID device ID class code revision ID header type and command and status fields The 53C896 supports two LVDS channels One channel controls slow devices such as CD ROMs and DVDs the other channel provides a high speed connection to the internal LVDS drives or an external disk array IDE Controller The PIIX4 multifunction device on the PHP I O baseboard acts as a PCI based Fast IDE controller that supports e PIO and IDE DMA bus master operations e Mode 4 timings e transfer rates up to 33 MB sec e buffering for PCI IDE burst transfers e master slave IDE mode Server Management SM 190 During normal operation SM receives information about the status of the server SM also monitors the power supply voltages and operating temperature of the server If SM determines that the server is not operating within specified limits it attempts to notify a supervisor or an administrator about the condition of the server The microcontrollers on the front panel board disk backplane and PHP I O baseboard implement the server management features Chap
67. 0100h 03FFh before performing any other address range checking Enabled lets the BIOS automatically detect and correct single bit memory errors When enabled the data returned and buffered for a delayed inbound read may be reaccessed following a disconnect Configures the number of Dwords that will be prefetched on memory read multiple commands Configures the number of Dwords that will be prefetched on memory read multiple commands Configures the number of Dwords that will be prefetched on memory read multiple commands Only enable when the total number of bootable devices is less than eight Enable this node only when nonPCI compliant VGA cards need to be debugged Enabling will impact I O resources for a large configuration Security Menu Feature User Password Is Administrator Password Is Set User Password Set Administrator Password Password on Boot Diskette Access Secure Mode Timer Secure Mode Hot Key Secure Mode Boot Video Blanking Diskette Write Protect Front Panel Lockout Option Clear Clear Enter Enter Disabled Enabled User Administrator Disabled 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 1 hr 2hr 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Description When you enter your user password this field automatically changes to set When you enter your administ
68. 067 GB per second Although several DIMM population options are available the following table lists the populations that should be used to add memory to the system Table 19 1 Memory Module DIMM Support Category Supported DIMM Variety Speed 50 ns 60 ns Capacity Organization Refresh 32 MB 16 Mbit 4Mx4 DRAM 2 K or 4 K refresh 64 MB 64 Mbit 8Mx8 DRAM 4 K refresh 256 MB Double high 64 Mbit 16Mx4 DRAM 4K or 8K refresh Voltage 3 3 V Data Width x72 ECC Page Mode EDO Buffered Non Buffered Maximum Height 2 4 inches DRAM Package TSSOP The memory module supports only CAS before RAS refresh When selecting a module make sure that the target refresh number corresponds to CBR refresh All DIMMs within a given bank must be identical From bank to bank the 450NX PCI chipset supports different varieties of DIMM sizes manufacturers and speeds Only configuration adhering to the following rules are validated and they are the only configuration that are fully supported e All DIMMs within a given back must be identical e Install 32 64 and 256 MB DIMMs in the memory banks e The total number of DIMMs on both memory modules 4 8 16 24 or 32 two memory module configuration e The total number of DIMMs using only one memory module must be 4 8 12 or 16 one memory module and one memory terminator configuration Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory e Install an equal number of DIMMs on each m
69. 1 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D51 D52 D53 Signal VCC MD64_L VCC MD68_L VCC VCC VCC 12C_BMC_SCL VCC 12C_BMC_SDA VCC GRCMPLT L VCC BANK1_L VCC CSTB_L VCC MA3_L VCC MA7_L VCC MA11_L VCC VCC VCC TCK VCC MD2_L VCC MD6_L VCC MD10_L VCC MD15_L VCC MRESET L VCC MD19 L VCC Pin E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 E47 E48 E49 E50 E51 E52 E53 continued Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory Memory Module Connector D amp E continued Signal Pin Signal Pin GND D54 MD23_L E54 MD25_L D55 VCC E55 GND D56 MD27_L E56 MD29_L D57 VCC E57 GND D58 MD30_L E58 MD32_L D59 VCC E59 GND D60 MD35_L E60 247 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage This chapter describes the modular power system and explains how to calculate power usage for your server Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 AC Input Power The server can operate with input voltages of 200 240VAC or 100 120VAC A jumper located on the midplane selects the input voltage at which the server will operate The jumper also enables disables the brown out recovery feature that
70. 12 38 GND 3 GND 21 GND 38 GND 4 GND 22 PRED_FAIL_PSxl 40 M12V 12V 5 VBIAS 24V 23 PSx_SCL SC SCL 41 PSx_SDA SC SDA 6 12V_SENSE 24 PGOOD AC Ok 42 PSx_FAULT 12V Rem Sense 7 VCC5STBY 25 P5V_LS 5V Load Share 43 P3_3V_LS 3 3V Load Share 8 GND_SENSE 26 P12V_LS 44 PWR_ON_SUPPLIES Gnd Rem Sense 12V Load Share 9 spare 27 PSxRS3 45 PSxRS5 3 3V Rem Sense 10 spare 28 spare 46 PSx_PRESENT 11 GND 29 GND 47 GND 12 GND 30 GND 48 GND 13 VCC3 31 GND 49 GND 14 VCC3 32 GND 50 GND 15 VCC3 33 GND 51 GND 16 VCC3 34 VCC5 52 VCCS5 17 VCC3 35 VCCS5 53 VCC5 18 VCC3 36 VCCS5 54 VCCS5 Peripheral Power Connector J11 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 VCC12 11 VCC12 2 GND 12 GND 3 VCC12 13 VCC12 4 VCC5 14 VCC5 5 GND 15 GND 6 VCC5 16 VCC5 7 GND 17 GND 8 12C_GLOBAL_SCL 18 12C_GLOBAL_SDA 9 GND 19 GND 10 PWR_GOOD 20 RESET_IIC_L 181 16 Peripheral Bay Backplane Description This chapter describes the peripheral bay backplane and lists its SCSI ID Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Peripheral Bay Backplane The WideUltra disk backplane supports hot swapping of SCA type SCSI drives manages the enclosure chassis and monitors server functions conforming to the SCSI Accessed Fault Tolerant Enclosures SAF TE specification
71. 4 2 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 5 75 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 25 31 5 60 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 9 72 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 5 75 12 16 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 35 8 43 3 85 13 256 256K 40x25 8x8 320 X 200 Graphics 12 5 31 5 70 187 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Extended VGA Modes 188 Mode s in Hex 58 6A 58 6A 58 6A 58 6A 5C 5C 5C 5C 5C 5D 5D 5D 5D 5D 5E 5F 5F 5F 5F 60 60 60 60 60 60 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 Interlaced Mode 32K Direct Color 256 Color Mixed Mode Colors number palette size 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 16 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 256 256K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 64K 32K 32K Char x Row 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 100 x 37 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 80 x 25 80 x 30 80 x 30 80 x 30 80 x 30 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 128 x 48 Char Cell Resolution 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 6
72. 40 x 400 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 1024 X 768 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 640 X 480 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 800 X 600 640 X 480 640 X 480 Pixel Freq MHz 36 40 50 49 5 36 40 50 49 5 56 25 44 9 65 75 77 78 5 25 25 31 5 31 5 36 44 9 65 75 77 78 7 94 5 25 31 5 31 5 36 36 40 50 49 5 56 25 25 31 5 Horiz Freq KHz 35 2 37 8 48 1 46 9 35 2 37 9 48 1 46 9 53 7 35 5 48 3 56 58 60 31 5 31 5 37 9 37 5 43 3 35 5 48 3 56 58 60 68 3 31 5 37 9 37 5 43 3 35 2 37 8 48 1 46 9 53 7 31 5 37 9 Vert Freq Hz 56 60 72 75 56 60 72 75 85 43 60 70 72 75 70 60 72 75 85 43 60 70 72 75 85 60 72 75 85 56 60 72 75 85 60 72 continued Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Extended VGA Modes continued Colors Pixel Horiz Vert Mode s number Char x Char Freq Freq Freq in Hex palette size Row Cell Resolution MHz KHz Hz 66 32K a 640 X 480 31 5 37 5 75 66 32K 640 X 480 36 43 3 85 67 32K 800 X 600 36 35 2 56 67 32K gt a 800 X 600 40 37 8 60 67 32K 800 X 600 50 48 1 72 67 32K 800 X 600 49 5 46 9 75 67 32K 800 X 600 56 25 53 7 85 68 32K 1024 x 768 44 9 35 5 43 68 32K 1024 x 768 65 48 3 60 68 32K 1024 x 768 75 56 70 68 32K 1024 x 768 78 7 60 75
73. 6 video display 267 U USB ports 20 185 Utilities BIOS setup 43 FRUSDR load utility 89 SCSISelect 41 V Video controller 20 187 drivers installing 37 standard VGA modes 187 W Warnings translations English 290 French 292 German 294 Italian 296 Spanish 298 vacant power supply bay 110 Weight of server 29 X XICMB bus 191 214
74. 6 X1XRTS_L B36 X1HRTS_L C36 X1D_L 3 A37 GND B37 GND C37 X1D_L 4 A38 X1D_L 2 B38 X1BE_L 0 C38 GND A39 GND B39 GND C39 X1D_L 6 A40 X1D_L 5 B40 X1PAR_L C40 X1D_L 8 A41 GND B41 GND C41 X1D_L 9 A42 X1D_L 7 B42 X1ADS_L C42 GND A43 GND B43 X1D_L 11 C43 X1D_L 12 A44 X1D_L 10 B44 X1BE_L 1 C44 X1D_L 14 A45 GND B45 X1XSTBN_L C45 X1D_L 15 A46 X1D_L 13 B46 GND C46 GND A47 GND B47 5V_SENSE C47 X1CLK A48 5V_RET_SENSE B48 GND C48 Expander Bus Connector Signal Section D amp E Signal Pin Signal Pin COM2_SIO_EN_A_ D1 PIC_CLK El STP_CLK_L D2 GND E2 IO_TRST_L D3 PICD 1 E3 PICD 0 D4 GND E4 INIT_L D5 RESET_PWR_DIST_L E5 GND D6 GND E6 BMC_SPI_BUS 2 D7 BMC_SPI_BUS 4 E7 GND D8 GND E8 X0IB_L D9 CIB_INTO E9 10_PWRGD D10 GND E10 12C_GLOBAL_SCL D11 INTR E11 GND D12 GND E12 DSELO_L D13 FERR_L E13 GND D14 GND E14 DCMPLTA_L D15 XOBLK_L E15 GND D16 GND E16 SIN_TTL_XIMB D17 XORST_L E17 GND D18 GND E18 SOUT_TTL_COM2 D19 SOUT_TTL_XIMB E19 GND D20 DCD_TTL_FP E20 XOXSTBP_L D21 GND E21 GND D22 WDEVT_L E22 continued 202 Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Expander Bus Connector Signal Section D amp E continued Signal XOHSTBP_L XOHSTBN_L ISP_MODE ISP_CLK ISP_FPC_EN_L 12V DVALIDB_L GND FP_TO_PIIX4_PWRBTN DSEL1_L X1IB_L PS_PWR_ON FP_NMI_SWT_L GND PWR_CNTR_RTC_L GND 12C_ CEL CONNECT_BMC GND I2C BACKUP SCL GND I2C BACKUP GDA GND X1XSTBP_L GND X1HSTBP_L X1H
75. 68 32K 1024 x 768 94 5 68 3 85 69 32K 1280 x 1024 75 48 43 69 32K 1280 x 1024 108 65 60 6C 16 256K 160 x 64 8 x 16 1280 X 1024 75 48 43 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8 x 16 1280 X 1024 75 48 43 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8 x 16 1280 X 1024 108 65 60 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8 x 16 1280 X 1024 126 76 71 2 6D 256 256K 160 x 64 8 x 16 1280 X 1024 135 80 75 71 16M 640 X 480 25 31 5 60 71 16M 640 X 480 31 5 37 9 72 71 16M 640 X 480 31 5 37 5 75 71 16M 640 X 480 36 43 3 85 74 64K 1024 X 768 44 9 35 5 43 74 64K 1024 X 768 65 48 3 60 74 64K 1024 X 768 75 56 70 74 64K 1024 X 768 78 7 60 75 74 64K 1024 X 768 94 5 68 3 85 75 64K 1280 X 1024 75 48 43 78 16M 800 x 600 36 35 2 56 78 16M 800 x 600 40 37 8 60 78 16M 800 x 600 50 48 1 72 78 16M z 800 x 600 49 5 46 9 75 78 16M 800 x 600 56 25 53 7 85 79 16M 800 x 600 44 9 35 5 43 79 16M 1024 x 768 65 483 60 Interlaced Mode 32K Direct Color 256 Color Mixed Mode continued 189 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Extended VGA Modes continued Colors Pixel Horiz Vert Mode s number Char x Char Freq Freq Freq in Hex palette size Row Cell Resolution MHz KHz Hz 79 16M 1024 x 768 75 56 70 79 16M 1024 x 768 78 7 60 75 79 16M 1024 x 768 94 5 68 3 85 7C 256 256K 144 x 54 8x16 1152 x 864 94 5 63 9 70 7C 256 256K 144 x 54 8x16 1152 x 864 108 67 5 75 7D 64K 1152 x 864 94 5 63 9 70 7D 64K 1152
76. 73 AD56 B73 GND A74 AD54 B74 AD55 A75 5 V B75 AD53 A76 AD52 B76 GND A77 AD50 B77 AD51 A78 GND B78 AD49 A79 AD48 B79 5 V A80 AD46 B80 AD47 A81 GND B81 AD45 A82 AD44 B82 GND A83 AD42 B83 AD43 A84 5 V B84 AD41 A85 AD40 B85 5 V A86 AD38 B86 AD39 A87 GND B87 AD37 A88 AD36 B88 5 V A89 AD34 B89 AD35 A90 GND B90 AD33 A91 AD32 B91 GND A92 RESERVED B92 RESERVED A93 GND B93 RESERVED A94 RESERVED B94 GND 206 Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers ISA Connector The ISA connector on the PHP I O baseboard follows the standard pinout given in the ISA Specification Pin Signal Pin Signal B1 GND Ground A1 IOCHK_L B2 RESET A2 SD7 B3 5 V A3 SD6 B4 IRQ9 A4 SD5 B5 5 V A5 SD4 B6 DRQ2 A6 SD3 B7 12 V A7 SD2 B8 SRDY_L A8 SD1 B9 12 V A9 SDO B10 GND A10 IOCHRDY B11 SMEMW_L A11 AEN B12 SMEMR_L A12 SA19 B13 IOW_L A13 SA18 B14 IOR_L A14 SA17 B15 DACK3_L A15 SA16 B16 DRQ3 A16 SA15 B17 DACK1_L A17 SA14 B18 DRQ1 A18 SA13 B19 REFRESH_L A19 SA12 B20 BCLK A20 SA11 B21 IRQ7 A21 SA10 B22 IRQ6 A22 SA9 B23 IRQ5 A23 SA8 B24 IRQ4 A24 SA7 B25 IRQ3 A25 SA6 B26 DACK2_L A26 SA5 B27 TC A27 SA4 B28 BALE A28 SA3 B29 5 V A29 SA2 B30 OSC 14 MHz A30 SA1 B31 GND A31 SAO Key Key D1 MEMCS16_L C1 SBHE_L D2 IOCS16_L C2 LA23 D3 IRQ10 C3 LA22 continued 207 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide ISA Connector continued Pin Signal Pin Signal D4 IRQ11 C4 LA21 D5 IRQ12 C5 LA20 D6 IRQ15 C6 L
77. A19 D7 IRQ14D C7 LA18 D8 DACKO_L C8 LA17 D9 DRQO C9 MEMR_L D10 DACK5_L C10 MEMW_L D11 DRQ5 C11 SD8 D12 DACK6_L C12 SD9 D13 DRQ6 C13 SD10 D14 DACK7_L C14 SD11 D15 DRQ7 C15 SD12 D16 5 V C16 SD13 D17 MASTER16_L C17 SD14 D18 GND C18 SD15 Diskette Drive Port Pin Name Pin Name 1 GND Ground 2 FD_DENSEL 3 GND 4 No Connection 5 Key 6 FD_DRATEO 7 GND 8 FD_INDEX_L 9 GND 10 FD_MTRO_L 11 GND 12 FD_DR1_L 13 GND 14 FD_DRO_L 15 GND 16 FD_MTR1_L 17 FD_MSEN1 18 FD_DIR_L 19 GND 20 FD_STEP_L 21 GND 22 FD_WDATA_L 23 GND 24 FD_WGATE_L 25 GND 26 FD_TRKO_L 27 FD_MSENO 28 FD_WPROT_L 29 GND 30 FD_RDATA_L 31 GND 32 FD_HDSEL_L 33 GND 34 FD_DSKCHG_L 208 Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Wide Fast 16 bit SCSI Port Signal Name Conn Pin Cable Pin Cable Pin Conn Pin Signal Name GND Ground 1 1 2 35 DB12_L GND 2 3 4 36 DB13_L GND 3 5 6 37 DB14_L GND 4 7 8 38 DB15_L GND 5 9 10 39 DBP1_L GND 6 11 12 40 DBO_L GND 7 13 14 41 DB1_L GND 8 15 16 42 DB2_L GND 9 17 18 43 DB3_L GND 10 19 20 44 DB4_L GND 11 21 22 45 DB5_L GND 12 23 24 46 DB6_L GND 13 25 26 47 DB7_L GND 14 27 28 48 DBP_L GND 15 29 30 49 GND GND 16 31 32 50 GND TERMPWR 17 33 34 51 TERMPWR TERMPWR 18 35 36 52 TERMPWR RESERVED 19 37 38 53 RESERVED GND 20 39 40 54 GND GND 21 41 42 55 ATN_L GND 22 43 44 56 GND GND 23 45 46 57 BSY_L GND 24 47 48 58 ACK_L GND 25 49 50 59 RST_L GND 26 51 52 60 MSG_L GND 27 53 54 61
78. AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Order Number 702026 003 Information in this document is provided in connection with Intel products No license express or implied by estoppel or otherwise to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document Except as provided in Intel s Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products Intel assumes no liability whatsoever and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty relating to sale and or use of Intel products including liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose merchantability or infringement of any patent copyright or other intellectual property right Intel products are not designed intended or authorized for use in any medical life saving or life sustaining applications or for any other application in which the failure of the Intel product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time without notice No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without prior consent of Intel t Third party brands and names are property of their respective owners Copyright 1998 1999 Intel Corporation All Rights Reserved Quick Reference and Conventions For translated warnings see Appendix C Warnings Part I User s Guide Introduction to the High performance Server On site Installation Installing the Server
79. B and C Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin MD_L 35 Al GND B1 MD_L 34 C1 GND A2 MD_L 32 B2 GND C2 MD_L 30 A3 GND B3 DSTBN_L 1 C3 GND A4 MD_L 28 B4 GND C4 MD_L 26 A5 GND B5 DSTBP_L 1 C5 GND A6 MD_L 24 B6 GND C6 MD _L 22 A7 GND B7 MD _L 21 C7 GND A8 GND B8 GND C8 MUXCLKO A B A9 GND B9 MD_L 17 C9 GND A10 GND B10 GND C10 MRESET_L A11 GND B11 Reserved C11 GND A12 MD_L 16 B12 GND C12 MD_L 14 A13 GND B13 MD_L 13 C13 GND A14 MD_L 11 B14 GND C14 MD_L 9 A15 GND B15 DSTBP_L 0 C15 GND A16 MD_L 7 B16 GND C16 MD_L 5 A17 GND B17 DSTBN_L 0 C17 GND A18 MD_L 3 B18 GND C18 MD_L 2 A19 GND B19 MD_L 1 C19 GND A20 MD_L 0 B20 GND C20 MEM A B _ TCK A21 GND B21 MEMA_TDI C21 GND A22 MEM A B _ TRST_L B22 GND C22 MA_ 12 A23 GND B23 MA_L 11 C23 GND A24 MA_L 9 B24 GND C24 MA_L 7 A25 GND B25 MA_L 6 C25 GND A26 MA_L 4 B26 GND C26 MA_L 3 A27 GND B27 MA_L 2 C27 GND A28 MA_L 1 B28 GND C28 MA_L 0 A29 GND B29 CSTB_L C29 GND A30 CMND1_L B30 GND C30 BANK1_L A31 GND B31 BANK2_L C31 GND A32 CARD 0 1 _L B32 GND C32 continued 223 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 224 Memory Connectors J23 and J20 Rows A B amp C continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin PHIT A B _L A33 GND B33 RCMPLT A B _L C33 GND A34 RHIT A B _L B34 GND C34 Reserved A35 GND B35 Reserved C35 GND A36 MD_L 71 B36 GND C36 MD_L 69 A37 GND B37 MD_L 68 C37 GND A38 MD_L 66 B38 GND C38 MD_L 64 A39 GND B39 DSTBN_L 3 C39 GND A40 MD_
80. BMC SCL 12C_BMC_SDA NMI_5V GROUND X0D_L 0 XOD_L 1 XOD_L 3 XOD_L 4 GROUND XOD_L 6 XOD_L 8 XOD_L 9 GROUND XOD_L 12 XOD_L 14 XOD_L 15 GROUND XOCLK GROUND CTS_TTL_FP RI_TTL_FP ISP_SDO INTRUSION_L ISP_SDI VCC_STDBY 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GROUND B GROUND XIMB_SOUT_EN GROUND IO_TDI GROUND CPU_SPI_RESET_L GROUND BMC_SPI_BUS 3 GROUND IGNNE_L GROUND XOXRTS_L GROUND XOD_L 2 GROUND XOD_L 5 GROUND XOD_L 7 GROUND XOD_L 10 GROUND XOD_L 13 GROUND GROUND DVALIDA_L DOFF1_L GROUND RTS_TTL_FP GROUND FAN_FAILED_L GROUND VCC_STDBY GROUND DS2P_12C_SDA Signals c GROUND SIN_TTL_COM2 IO_TMS PWRGDB A20M_L PROC_RESET_L GROUND BMC_SPI_BUS 5 SMI_L 12C_GLOBAL_SDA D COM2_TO_SIO_EN STPCLK_L IO_TRST_L PICD 0 INIT_L GROUND BMC_SPI_BUS 2 GROUND XOIB_L IO_PWRGD GROUND XOHRTS_L GROUND XOBE_L 0 GROUND XOPAR_L GROUND XOADS_L XOD_L 11 XOBE_L 1 XOXSTBN_L GROUND DOFFO_L GROUND DSR_TTL_FP GROUND ISP_FPC_SDO GROUND DTR_TTL_FP SPEAKER_DATA GROUND HARD_RESET GROUND DS2P_I2C_SCL GC GLOBAL SCL GROUND DSELO_L GROUND DCMPLTA_L GROUND SIN_TTL_XIMB GROUND SOUT_TTL_COM2 GROUND XOXSTBP_L GROUND XOHSTBP_L XOHSTBN_L ISP_MODE ISP_SCLK ISP_FPC_EN_L 12V DVALIDB_L GROUND FP_TO_PIIX4_PWRBTN DSEL1_L X11B_L PS_PWR_ON E PIC_CLK GROUND PICD 1 GROUND unused GROUND BMC_SPI_BUS 4 GROUND CIB_INT 0 GROUND INTR GROUND FERR_L GROUND XOBLK_L GROUND X
81. C Modify Delete Help Es EE Figure 7 6 Phonebook Dialog Options available in the dialog are e Server a dropdown list of server names stored in Phonebook If the New radio button is selected in the Operation area this area is cleared e Phone No the number of the selected server If the New radio button is selected in the Operation area this area is cleared e Operation New lets you add a new entry in the Phonebook Selecting this option clears the Server and Phone No fields You must click Save for the entry to be added to the Phonebook Modify lets you edit an existing entry You must select an existing entry from the Server dropdown list box and modify the existing phone number before selecting this option Click Save in order to update the entry in the phonebook Delete lets you delete an entry from the Phonebook You must first select an existing server from the Server dropdown list box before selecting this option You must click Save for the entry to be deleted e Save saves a new or modified Phonebook entry or deletes an entry if the Delete radio button is selected e Connect displays the Connect dialog with the server from the Phonebook s Server dropdown list box already populating the Connect dialog s Server field e Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action e Help displays the help information for this dialog 87 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide FRU Vi
82. CI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Connect all peripheral device cables that go to the I O panel on the rear of the system Run the SSU and use the saved configuration file to restore all options to the same settings For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling A B OM07317 Figure 13 17 PHP I O Baseboard A Snap on standoffs two B Screws thirteen 157 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide MidPlane Removing the Midplane 1 D Ein en A Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the CPU tray as described earlier Remove the I O Tray as described earlier Remove three screws holding the upper midplane support bracket and remove the bracket Remove four screws holding the midplane support bracket to the chassis and remove the bracket Remove and save the screws that attach the midplane to its support bracket and remove the midpl
83. CI hot plug PHP I O baseboard e WO riser card e Front panel board e Midplane e LVDS low voltage differential signal SCSI hot swap peripheral bay backplane The CPU baseboard is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis and the PHP I O baseboard is mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis The baseboards plug into connectors on the midplane mounted between them The midplane interconnects the baseboards with the memory modules and power supplies The front panel board is mounted in front of the CPU baseboard in the same plane It provides the user interface server management cooling system control and power control OM07311 Figure 1 1 High performance Server AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide The easy to integrate server can easily accommodate the needs of a variety of high performance applications for example network servers multiuser systems and large database operations As your application requirements increase you can upgrade your server with e More powerful processors e Additional memory e Other peripheral devices e Add in I O boards Server Features 18 Feature Power system with redundancy Server chassis Cooling system with redundancy Comment The 750 watt 220 VAC autoranging power supplies include integrated fans for cooling In a rack server with three supplies 2 1 the third one is redundant The supplies can be replaced hot swapped without turnin
84. CIONES DE SEGURIDAD Cuando extraiga la tapa del chasis para acceder al interior del sistema siga las siguientes instrucciones Apague todos los dispositivos perif ricos conectados al sistema 2 Apague el sistema presionando el interruptor encendido apagado 3 Desconecte todos los cables de alimentaci n CA del sistema o de las tomas de corriente alterna 4 Identifique y desconecte todos los cables enchufados a los conectores E S o a los puertos situados en la parte posterior del sistema 5 Cuando manipule los componentes es importante protegerse contra la descarga electrost tica ESD Puede hacerlo si utiliza una mu equera antiest tica sujetada a la toma de tierra del chasis o a cualquier tipo de superficie de metal sin pintar 6 No ponga en marcha el sistema si se han extra do las tapas del chasis Despu s de completar las seis instrucciones de SEGURIDAD mencionadas ya puede extraer las tapas del sistema Para ello 1 Extraiga y guarde todos los tornillos de las tapas 2 Extraiga las tapas Para obtener un enfriamiento y un flujo de aire adecuados reinstale siempre las tapas del chasis antes de poner en marcha el sistema Si pone en funcionamiento el sistema sin las tapas bien colocadas puede da ar los componentes del sistema Para instalar las tapas 1 Aseg rese primero de no haber dejado herramientas o componentes sueltos dentro del sistema 2 Compruebe que los cables las placas adicionales y otros compone
85. Cache power only J6 Processor 4 Processor core power only Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM See Figure 13 6 1 2 3 4 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Using a small flat bladed screwdriver push the plastic ejector levers on each end of the connector away from the VRM to eject it out of the connector Place the VRM on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Installing a DC to DC Converter VRM See Figure 13 6 1 2 138 Remove the DC to DC converter VRM from the antistatic package Carefully insert the VRM in the connector on the CPU baseboard Make sure you do not bend the connector pins Push down firmly on each end of the VRM until the ejector levers of the connector snap into place locking the VRM in the connector Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07318 Figure 13 6 DC to DC Converter VRM gt crronmuou VRM socket DC to DC Converter VRM Ejector lever J1 VRM connector J3 VRM connector J2 VRM connector J5 VRM connector J6 VRM connector J4 VRM connecto
86. DCD_TTL_FP DSR_TTL_FP CTS_TTL_FP RI_TTL_FP GND VCC_STDBY RTS_TTL_FP DTR_TTL_FP GND key position Pin 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 Signal 5V GND FAN_FAILED_L SPEAKER_DATA INTRUSION_L RESERVED GND BMC_TO_FPC_RST_CMD PROC_RESET_L SYS_RESET_STATE RST_SFC_L SECURE_MODE_BMC HARD_RESET FP_NMI_SWT_L RESERVED GND PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L PWR_GOOD PS PWR_ON GND 12C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC I2C_CEL CONNECT BMC A 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND RESERVED 12C BACKUP _SCL IOC BACKUP GDA GND 211 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Legacy Connector The legacy connector on the PHP I O baseboard provides the signals for the external legacy VGA serial parallel mouse and keyboard peripheral ports Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Al VCC_STDBY A21 PP_STB_L B1 5V B21 SPO_RTS_L A2 KB_DATA A22 PP SUN L B2 MS_DATA B22 GND A3 KB_CLK A23 PP_INIT_L B3 MS CLK B23 SP RTS L A4 5V A24 PP_ERR_L B4 SIN TTL XIMB B24 SPO CTS L A5 SOUT_TTL_XIMB A25 PPR AFD L B5 SIN_TTL_COM2 B25 SP1_CTS_L A6 PP_SLCT A26 12C_BMC_SCL B6 SPO_DCD L B26 RTL TTL FP_L A7 PP PE A27 DSR TTL FP B7 SP1 DCD L B27 DTR TTL FP L A8 PP_BUSY A28 CTS_ TTL FP B8 SPO_SIN B28 DCD_TTL_FP_L A9 PP ACK L A29 RT_TTL_FP B9 GND B29 I2C BMC SDA MO GND A30 COM2_TO_STD_EN B10 SP1 SIN B30
87. Disk twee decreed ee 102 Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier 102 Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot docking Bay 104 Hot swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 106 11 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping Tools and Supplies You Need WEE 109 Equipment Log EE 109 Hot SWapping a Power OUDDLY asustar cal 110 Removing a Power Supply EE 110 Replacing a Ge TT e TEE 112 Part Il Service Technician s Guide Safety Guidelines Elle Eege 115 Server Precautions EE 115 Equipment Rack Precattions une re 116 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Warnings and EIER 119 Tools and Supplies You Need WEE 119 Equipment danesa EE 119 COV EE 119 Removing the Peripheral Bay Cover ss 120 Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Cover 120 Removing the e 121 Reinstalling the Front Bezel cocos il a 121 Removing thie Top ere EE 121 Reinstalling the Top Cover eaten tt 123 Removing the PCI Bus Hot Plug Cover kee 123 Reinstalling the PCI Bus Hot Plug Cover ss 124 Removing the Fan Array Assembly Cover 125 vii AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Reinstalling the Fan Array Assembly Cover 125 Removing the Memory Module Cover 125 Reinstalling the Memory Module Cover 126 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Warnings and ee 127 Tools and Supplies You Need 127 Eguipment e TEE 127 Fan Array HOUSING WEE 128 Removing the Fan Array Housing 128 Reinstalling the Fan Array Housing ea 128 EE
88. E5 12C_BACKUP_SDA D6 MIOC_INTREQ_L E6 GND D7 GND E7 12C_BACKUP_SCL D8 X1RST_L E8 GND D9 GND E9 12C_CEL_ CONNECT D10 X1BLK_L E10 GND D11 GND E11 PWR_CNTRL_RTC D12 12C_CEL_ CONNECT_FPC E12 GND D13 GND E13 FP_NMI_SWT_L D14 PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L E14 PS_PWR_ON D15 GND E15 X11B_L D16 PWR_GOOD E16 RESERVED D17 GND E17 FP_TO_PIIX4_PWR D18 SECURE_MODE_BMC E18 GND D19 GND E19 ISP_EN2_L D20 CPU_SLP_L E20 12V D21 GND E21 ISP_FPC_EN_L D22 12V E22 continued 227 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 228 OConnector J22 Rows D 4 E continued Signal ISP_SCLK ISP_MODE XOHSTBN_L XOHSTBP_L GND XOXSTBP_L GND SOUT_TTL_COM2 GND SIN_TTL_ XIMB GND RESERVED GND RESET_HSBP_L GND 12C_ GLOBAL GCL IO_PWRGD XOIB_L GND BMC_SPI_ BUS 2 GND INIT_L PICD 0 IO_TRST_L STPCLK_L COM2 TO SIO EN Pin D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 Signal GND ISP_EN_L GND GND GND DCD_TTL_FP GND SOUT_TTL_XIMB GND XORST_L GND XOBLK_L GND FERR_L GND INTR RESERVED RESERVED GND BMC_SPI_BUS 4 GND RESET_PWR_DIST_L GND PICD 1 GND PIC_CLK Pin E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 E47 E48 Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Power Connectors Power Connectors J21B J21C J12D J24B DAC
89. EEE FE System Setup Utility Figure 5 8 System Event Log Main Window Sensor Data Record SDR Manager Add In In this window you can e Examine all SDR records through the BMC in either Hex or Verbose mode e Examine SDR records by Record type in either Hex or Verbose mode e Examine SDR records from a previously stored binary file in either Hex or Verbose mode e Save the SDR records to a file in either text or binary form The SDR Manager can display SDR records in either raw form hexadecimal or in an interpreted easy to understand textual form verbose The SDR Manager s main window provides access to features of the add in through menus Each option included on the main menu supports an accelerator key Accelerator keys are indicated by an underlined letter in the text listing the option 71 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Menu Click On To File Open FRU Opens FRU data from a previously saved file Save SDR Saves SDR data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format Exit Quits the SDR Manager View SDR Info Displays SDR information as returned by the GetSDRinfo interface of the BMC All Records Displays all records in the SDR repository By Record Displays all records in the SDR repository sorted by record type Settings Display HEX Displays SDR records in Hex format Display Verbose Displays SDR records in verbose format Output Text Saves SDR data in verbose format Output Binary Saves SDR data in binary fo
90. GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 20 54 S17 TERMPWR S51 TERMPWR S14 DB P S48 DB P S11 DB5 S45 DB 5 S8 DB 2 S42 DB 2 S5 DB P1 S39 DB P1 S2 DB 13 S36 DB 13 GND SDA PWR_GOOD E FD_DSKCHG_L FD_HDSEL_L FD_RDATA_L FD_WPROT_L FD_MSENO FD_TRKO_L FD_WGATE_L FD_WDATA_L FD_STEP_L FD_DIR_L FD_MSEN1 FD_MTR1_L FD_DRO_L FD_DR1_L FD_MTRO_L FD_INDEX_L FD_DRATEO KEY N C FD_DENSEL OEM 1 OEM 2 OEM 3 S67 DB 10 S33 DB 10 S64 1 0 S30 1 O S61 SEL S27 SEL S58 ACK ACK S55 ATN S21 S52 TERMPWR S18 TERMPWR S49 15 S46 DB 6 S12 DB 6 S43 DB 3 S9 DB 3 S40 DB 0 S6 DB 0 S37 DB 14 S3 DB 14 GND Reserved SCL Power Connector J2 Chapter 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Description Pin O WON DOO WD Signal 12v GND 12v 5v GND 5v GND SCL GND PWR_GOOD Pin Signal 11 412v 12 GND 13 12v 14 5v 15 GND 16 5v 17 GND 18 SDA 19 GND 20 Reserved Diskette Connector J3 Pin Ni a w Kei 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Signal GND GND KEY GND GND GND GND GND FD_MSEN1 GND GND GND GND FD_MSENO GND GND GND Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 Signal FD_DENSEL N C FD_DRATEO FD_INDEX_L FD_MTRO_L FD_DR1_L FD_DRO_L FD_MTR1_L FD_DIR
91. Guide Initial Startup of the Server Problems that occur at initial startup are usually caused by incorrect installation or configuration of the server Hardware failure is a less frequent cause Checklist 262 a LI UU DO DOODO O a Are all cables correctly connected and secured Are the processors packaged in S E C cartridges fully seated in the slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard Chapter 13 Are front side bus terminator modules installed in all unused slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard Chapter 13 Are the memory modules fully seated in the connectors on the midplane Chapter 13 Are all DIMMs on the memory module installed correctly Chapter 19 Are all add in ISA and PCI boards fully seated in their slots on the PHP I O baseboard Chapter 13 Are all jumper settings on the PHP I O and CPU baseboards correct Chapters 17 and 18 Are all jumper and switch settings on add in boards and peripheral devices correct To check settings refer to the manufacturer s documentation Ensure there are no conflicts for example two add in boards sharing the same interrupt Are all add in boards installed correctly Chapter 13 If the server has a hard disk drive is it properly formatted or defined Is the disk backplane configured correctly Chapter 16 Are all device drivers properly installed Chapter 2 Are the configuration settings made with the SSU correct Chapter 5 Is the operating syst
92. I hot plug bus master slots on the PHP I O baseboard provide maximum performance at the wider bus width gt NOTE Both 32 bit and 64 bit PCI boards may be installed in the 64 bit slots However the 32 bit boards will not take advantage of the extra bandwidth provided by the 64 bit bus Add in video boards must be installed in the 32 bit primary PCI slots ISA Expansion Slot The ISA bus master slot on the PHP VO baseboard provides for legacy expansion The ISA slot shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with a 32 bit PCI slot you can use the shared slot for either ISA or PCI but not both The ISA bus operates at up to 8 33 MHz and provides e 24 bit memory addressing e type A transfers at 5 33 MB per second e type B transfers at 8 MB per second e 8 or 16 bit data transfers e interrupt sharing 186 Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers PCI Video Controller The onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator is a 64 bit DRAM based SVGA controller with hardware accelerated BitBLT transfers of data video playback and video capture to the frame buffer The frame buffer is addressable through a 16 Mbyte window consisting of three 4 Mbyte byte swapping apertures and a special video aperture The SVGA controller also features a 64 bit GUI BitBLT engine with double buffered memory mapped control registers The control registers are relocatable anywhere in the 64 Kbyte space this allow
93. IO E 131 Removing the LCD Module nee 131 Reinstalling the LCD Modul eis es aa RR 131 Memory Modules eegene il odds ca dios 132 Removing a Memory Module vicio da 132 Reinstalling a Memory Module 133 Front Side Bus Terminator Module 135 Removing a Terminator Module nen ee 135 Reinstalling a Terminator Module AAA 135 PROCOSSOR is 4 EE e 137 Removing a See 137 Installing a e E 137 DG to DC Converter VRM scort ln kleben 138 Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM us 138 Installing a DC to DC Converter VM 138 E Dag E 140 Removing the CPU EE 140 Reinstalling the GPU Tray ee aa a dues 140 FronbPanel Board EE 142 Removing the Front Panel Board ccc tee denge dti tiie ven ocean 142 Reinstalling the Front Panel Board AAA 143 BAGS DO ESP eek 144 Removing the CPU Baseboard ennet 144 Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard 144 Add imBoard St en ae 146 Installing an Add in BOK EE 146 Removing an Add nBoard n nn 149 VO Riser Eeer 150 Removing the I O Riser Card sio tentes 150 Reinstalling the VO Riser Card aaa HE 150 PIA eebe 152 Removing the VO Tray EE 152 Reinstalling the PO Tray ties 152 Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB Board 154 Removing the ICMB Board DEE 154 Reinstalling the ICMB Board ccc eege ie 154 viii Contents PPP ALO EAS COA BEE 156 Removing the PHP I O Baseboard EE 156 Reinstalling the PHP
94. L 62 B40 GND C40 MD_L 60 A41 GND B41 DSTBP_L 3 C41 GND A42 GND B42 GND C42 MUXCLK1 A B A43 GND B43 MD_L 56 C43 GND A44 GND B44 GND C44 MD_L 54 A45 GND B45 Reserved C45 GND A46 Reserved B46 GND C46 MD_L 53 A47 GND B47 MD_L 52 C47 GND A48 MD_L 50 B48 GND C48 MD_L 48 A49 GND B49 DSTBP_L 2 C49 GND A50 MD_L 46 B50 GND C50 MD_L 44 A51 GND B51 DSTBN_L 2 C51 GND A52 MD_L 42 B52 GND C52 MD_L 40 A53 GND B53 MD_L 39 C53 GND A54 MD_L 37 B54 GND C54 Memory Connectors J23 and J20 Rows D amp E Signal Pin Signal Pin GND D1 MD_L 33 E1 MD_L 31 D2 1 5V E2 GND D3 MD_L 29 E3 MD_L 27 D4 GND E4 GND D5 MD_L 25 E5 MD_L 23 D6 1 5V E6 GND D7 MD_L 20 E7 MD_L 19 D8 GND E8 GND D9 MD_L 18 E9 Reserved D10 GND E10 GND D11 Reserved E11 MD_L 15 D12 1 5V E12 GND D13 MD_L 12 E13 MD_L 10 D14 GND E14 GND D15 MD_L 8 E15 MD_L 6 D16 1 5V E16 continued Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Memory Connectors J23 and J20 Rows D amp E continued Signal GND GND GND GND GND GND GND MA_L 8 GND GND GND GND GND BANKO_L GND GND GND GND GND MD_L 70 GND MD_L 65 GND MD_L 61 GND MD_L 58 GND MD_L 55 GND Reserved GND MD_L 49 GND MD_L 45 GND MD_L 41 GND MD_L 36 Pin D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50 D I D52 D53 D54
95. Need e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 109 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Hot Swapping a Power Supply In a fully configured server the power system contains three 750 watt auto ranging power supplies one of the power supplies is redundant If a single power supply fails in the redundant power system the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on You can easily hot swap the defective power supply without turning the server power off Power supplies are hot swappable only in configurations with three power supplies A WARNING Because of chassis airflow disruption the power supply bay should not be vacant for more than two minutes when server power is on Exceeding the two minute limit may cause damage to certain peripheral components Before replacing a power supply in a two power supply configuration you must turn off power to the server A filler panel is required in a two power supply configuration The filler panel must be installed within two minutes when moving from a three power supply configuration to a two power supply configuration amp NOTE If the system contains less that two power supplies or AC is not present in at least two power
96. ORST_L GROUND SOUT_TTL_XIMB DCD_TTL_FP GROUND WDEVT_L GROUND DCMPLTB_L ISP_EN_L GROUND 12V GROUND CPU_SLP_L GROUND SECURE_MODE_BMC GROUND PWR_GOOD GROUND continued F16 and Front Panel Connector J3 continued Chapter 15 Midplane Description Voltages Pins 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 A X1D_L 0 X1D_L 1 X1D_L 3 X1D_L 4 GROUND X1D_L 6 X1D_L 8 X1D_L 9 GROUND X1D_L 12 X1D_L 14 X1D_L 15 GROUND X1CLK GROUND X1XRTS_L GROUND X1D_L 2 GROUND X1D_L 5 GROUND X1D_L 7 GROUND X1D_L 10 GROUND X1D_L 13 GROUND 5V_RET_SENSE Signals C GROUND X1HRTS_L GROUND X1BE_L 0 GROUND X1PAR_L GROUND X1ADS_L X1D_L 11 X1BE_L 1 X1XSTBN_L GROUND 5V_SENSE GROUND D E FP_NMI_SWT_L PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L GROUND GROUND PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L 12C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC GROUND GROUND 12C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC X1BLK_L GROUND GROUND 12C_BACKUP_SCL X1RST_L GROUND GROUND 12C_BACKUP_SDA MIOC_INTREQ_L GROUND GROUND X1XSTBP_L GROUND GROUND GROUND X1HSTBP_L GROUND X1HSTBN_L GROUND 175 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 176 Grand Connector to Mem A J4 and Mem B J1 Pins A 1 MD 35 2 GND 3 MD 30 4 GND 5 MD 26 6 GND 7 MD 22 8 GND 9 MUXCLKO 10 GND 11 MRESET 12 GND 13 MD 14 14 GND 15 MD 9 16 GND 17 MD 5 18 GND 19 MD 2 20 GND 21 TCK 22 GND 23 MA 12 24 GND 25 MA 7 26 GND
97. PHP I O baseboard connector with the midplane connector Reinstall the three securing screws Connect all internal cables to the PHP I O baseboard Reinstall all add in boards if removed as described earlier Connect all internal cables connected to the add in boards installed in the expansion slots Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OL A gt le eee a OM07310 Figure 13 15 I O Tray A Screws three B Eject insert levers C WO Tray 153 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB Board Removing the ICMB Board See Figure 13 16 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the ICMB signal cable from connector J1 on the I O riser card Remove and save the screw that attach the ICMB board to the I O Tray Push on the tab of the snap on standoff and pull the board toward you to remove it from the snap on standoff Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the ICMB Board See Figure 13 16 154 1 2 3 a Remove the ICMB board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you plac
98. Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 Signal GND 5V_SENSE GND X1XSTBN_L X1BE_L 1 X1D_L 11 X1ADS_L GND X1PAR_L GND X1BE_L 0 GND X1HRTS_L GND DS2P_I2C_ SCL GND HARD_ RESET GND SPEAKER_ DATA DTR_TTL_FP GND ISP_FPC_ SDO GND RESERVED GND ISP_HSBP_ SDO GND XOXSTBN_L XOBE_L 1 X0D_L 11 XOADS L GND XOPAR_L GND XOBE_L 0 GND Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 continued Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard UO Connector J22 Rows A B amp C continued Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin X0D_L 1 A37 XOXRTS_L B37 XOHRTS_L C37 XOD_L 0 A38 GND B38 GND C38 GND A39 IGNNE_L B39 12C_ GLOBAL GDA C39 NMI_5V A40 GND B40 SMI_L C40 12C_BMC_SDA A41 BMC_SPI_BUS 3 B41 BMC_SPI_BUS 5 C41 12C_BMC_SCL A42 GND B42 GND C42 BMC_SPI_BUS 0 A43 CPU_CPI_RESET_L B43 PROC_ RESET_L C43 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 A44 GND B44 A20M_L C44 BMC_SPI_BUS 1 A45 IO TD B45 PWRGDB C45 IO_TDO A46 GND B46 IO_TMS C46 IO_TCK A47 XIMB_ SOUT_ENT B47 SIN_TTL_ COM2 C47 COM2_TO_FP_EN A48 GND B48 GND C48 1 0 Connector J22 Rows D amp E Signal Pin Signal Pin X1HSTBN_L D1 GND El X1HSTBP_L D2 GND E2 GND D3 GND ES X1XSTBP_L D4 RESERVED E4 GND D5 GND
99. Press lt F10 gt to exit and save the settings then press lt Enter gt to confirm and to reboot the server To protect the contents of flash memory turn off the server unplug the power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets and remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Move the jumper from J2C1B pins 4 B C to pins 4 A B to write protect the flash memory device 10 Reinstall the covers plug in the power cords and turn on the server gt NOTE If the system BIOS becomes corrupted during the update process for example a power outage occurs follow the Recovering the BIOS procedure on page 197 Recovering the BIOS Moving the boot option jumper on J2C1 from pins 2 B C to pins 2 A B enables the BIOS flash memory boot recovery mode The BIOS can be corrupted for example when the update procedure is aborted due to a power outage However flash memory contains a protected area that cannot be corrupted Code in this area is used to boot the server from drive A when the BIOS has been corrupted After booting the Flash Update Utility FLASH is used to automatically recover the BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette To recover the BIOS 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Turn off the server and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets 3 Remove the top and right side covers See Chapter 12
100. RU file then the area is programmed into the FRU nonvolatile storage All areas are also written to the FRU TMP file 95 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Updating DMI Nonvolatile Storage Area After programming the BMC FRU area the utility then programs the following Chassis Board and Product FRU information to the DMI fields Example Loading DMI System Area Manufacturer Name Intel Name AC450NX Server System Version Number ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number 0123456789 Loading DMI Board Area Manufacturing Name Intel Name AC450NX Server System Serial Number 0123456789 Version Number 661880 303 Loading DMI Chassis Area Chassis Part Number 693792 003 Chassis Serial Number 200418630 Asset Tag If a failure occurs the utility displays an error message and exits Updating the SDR Nonvolatile Storage Area After the utility validates the header area of the supplied SDR file it updates the SDR repository area Before programming the utility clears the SDR repository area The utility filters all tagged SDRs depending on the product configuration set in the configuration file Nontagged SDRs are automatically programmed The utility also copies all written SDRs to the SDR TMP file it contains an image of what was loaded The TMP file is also useful for debugging the server Cleaning Up and Exiting If an update was successfully performed the utility displays a single message and then exits
101. Reset switch NMI switch Power LED green Power fault LED yellow Cooling fault LED yellow Drive fault yellow Front panel LCD Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server Power on Self Test Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and the power on self test POST starts running POST checks the I O system board processor system board keyboard and most installed peripheral devices During the memory test POST displays the amount of memory that it is able to access and test Depending on the amount of memory installed on each memory board the test may take several minutes These screen prompts and messages appear after the memory test Mouse initialized Keboard detected Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP Do NOT press lt F2 gt The above message remains for about a second and POST continues The server beeps once and this message appears Operating system not found Go to Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD on page 36 35 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD CAUTION The Server Configuration Software CD contains only a limited operating system This limited operating system provides enough function to let you boot from the CD and copy and use the utility and manual files from the CD But this limited OS is NOT intended to be copied onto diskettes or onto your hard disk as a full fu
102. STBN_L Pin D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 Signal GND DCMPLTB_L ISP_EN_L GND 12V GND CPU_SLP_L GND SECURE_MODE_BMC GND PWR_GOOD GND PWR_CNTR_SFC GND I2C_CEL CONNECT _FPC GND X1BLK_L GND X1RST_L GND MIOC_INTREQ_L GND GND GND GND GND Pin E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 E40 E41 E42 E43 E44 E45 E46 E47 E48 203 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Expander Bus Connector Power Section Connectors J10H1C and J10H1D Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 5V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 5V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 5V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 5V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 5V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 5V Connector J4H1D and J10H1B Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 3 3V Con
103. Serial Number ASCII 0123456789 Asset Tag ASCII END OF FIELDS CODE Displaying SDR Area 94 The SDR nonvolatile storage area is displayed in the following hex format The data is separated by a Sensor Record Number X header where X is the number of that sensor record in the SDR area The next line after the header is the sensor record data in hex format delineated by spaces Each line holds up to 16 bytes The data on each line is followed by the same data in ASCH format nonprintable characters are substituted by a period Example To display the SDR area type frusdr d sdr and press lt Enter gt A message similar to the following appears Reading SDR Record 1 OE 00 10 01 37 20 00 OF 05 00 10 F1 F8 02 01 85 EE 02 00 00 00 04 00 00 C4 02 00 08 30 C2 07 91 Bb Obscene 8E FE 00 TB 1B 00 99 95 00 8A 8E 02 02 0001 CO OO ne 53 43 53 49 2D 42 2D 54 65 72 6D 33 SCSI B Term3 Reading SDR Record 2 OE 40 10 01 30 20 00 13 05 00 10 F1 F8 04 01 05 H CSC Pehl ve lend setae 00 00 00 20 29 00 00 1E 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF 00 03 03 00 00 00 00 42 49 02 02 00 01 C5 eee Bi geg 46 41 4E 2D 32 FAN 2 Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Using Specified CFG File The utility can be run with the command line parameter of cfg filename cfg The filename can be any DOS accepted eight character filename string The utility loads the specified CFG file and uses
104. Signal Pin Signal Pin GND A39 GND B39 VTT C39 SPARECLKO A40 GND B40 NC C40 GND A41 GND B41 VTT C41 MDO_L A42 VCC B42 MD1_L C42 GND A43 MD3_L B43 GND C43 MD5_L A44 VCC B44 DSTBNO_L C44 GND A45 MD7_L B45 GND C45 MD9_L A46 VCC B46 DSTBPO_L C46 GND A47 MD11_L B47 GND C47 MD13_L A48 VCC B48 MD14_L C48 GND A49 TDI B49 GND C49 MD16_L A50 VCC B50 TRST_L C50 GND A51 GND B51 VTT C51 MUXCLKO A52 GND B52 MD18_L C52 GND A53 GND B53 VTT C53 MD21_L A54 VCC B54 MD22 L C54 GND A55 MD24_L B55 GND C55 MD26_L A56 VCC B56 DSTBP1_L C56 GND A57 MD28_L B57 GND C57 GDCMPLT_L A58 VCC B58 DSTBN1_L C58 GND A59 MD31_L B59 GND C59 MD33_L A60 VCC B60 MD34_L C60 Memory Module Connector D E Signal Pin Signal Pin MD37_L D1 VCC E1 GND D2 MD38_L E2 MD40_L D3 VCC E3 GND D4 MD42_L E4 MD44_L D5 VCC E5 GND D6 MD47_L E6 MD49_L D7 VCC E7 GND D8 MD52_L E8 TDO D9 VCC E9 GND D10 VCC E10 MD55_L D11 VCC E11 GND D12 MD57_L E12 MD58_L D13 VCC E13 GND D14 MD60_L E14 continued 245 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 246 Memory Module Connector D amp E continued Signal MD62_L GND MD66_L GND MD70_L GND NC GND PWRGD GND RHIT_L GND CARD_L GND CMND1_L GND MA1_L GND MA5_L GND MA9 L GND MA12 L GND VCC GND VCC GND MD4_L GND MD8_L GND MD12_L GND TMS GND MD17_L GND MD20_L Pin D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D4
105. TION Ensure that the power service connection is through a properly grounded outlet The site must also be e Clean and dust free e Well ventilated and away from sources of heat e Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields and electrical noise caused by electrical devices such as air conditioners large fans large electric motors radio and TV transmitters and high frequency security devices e Spacious enough to provide sufficient room behind and around the server so that you can remove AC power from it by unplugging the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet e Away from sources of vibration or physical shock 29 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Physical Specifications Height 31 12 cm 12 25 inches Width 44 45 cm 17 5 inches Depth 71 12 cm 28 0 inches Weight 51 4 kg 113 lbs minimum configuration 60 kg 132 lbs maximum configuration Environmental Specifications 30 Temperature Nonoperating Operating Humidity Operating wet bulb Nonoperating Operating Shock Nonoperating Operating Altitude Acoustic Sound pressure Sound power Electrostatic discharge ESD AC Input Power 100 120 V 200 240 V 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 5 to 40 C 41 to 104 F with maximum derated 1 C for every 1000 ft 305 m above 1524 m 5000 ft Not to exceed 37 6 C 100 4 F without peripherals 95 noncondensing at 55 C 131 F 85 noncondensing at 40 C 104 F 30 g
106. XIMB SOUT EN A11 PP_DR7 A31 COM2_TO_FP_EN B11 SPO_RI_L B31 SOUT_TTL_COM2 A12 PP_DR6 A32 GND B12 SP1_RILL B32 PWR_GOOD A13 PP_DR5 A33 GND B13 GND B33 GND A14 PP_DR4 A34 GND B14 SPO_DTR_L B34 GND A15 GND A35 V_BLUE B15 SP1_DTR_L B35 V_VSYNC A16 PP_DR3 A36 GND B16 SPO_SOUT B36 GND A17 PP_DR2 A37 V_GREEN B17 SP1_SOUT B37 V_HSYNC A18 PP_DR1 A38 GND B18 No connection B38 GND A19 PP_DRO A39 V_RED B19 SPO_DSR_L B39 VR_DDCDAT A20 GND A40 GND B20 SP1_DSR_L B40 VR_DDCCLK USB Port OM06248 Pin Signal Description Al VCC Overcurrent monitor line port 0 A2 DATALO Differential data line paired with DATAHO A3 DATAHO Differential data line paired with DATALO A4 GND Ground potential Bi VCC Overcurrent monitor line port 1 B2 DATAL1 Differential data line paired with DATAH1 B3 DATAH1 Differential data line paired with DATAL1 B4 GND Ground potential 212 Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Keyboard and Mouse Ports These identical PS 2 compatible ports share a common housing The top one is the mouse and the bottom one is the keyboard OM00951A Pin oO OP OD Serial Ports Mouse Signal MSEDAT mouse data No connection GND Ground FUSED_VCC 5 V MSECLK mouse clock No connection oO a BR OD Keyboard Signal KEYDAT keyboard data No connection GND Ground FUSED_VCC 5 V KEYCLK keyboard clock No connection
107. _L A12 GND A43 PAR B12 GND B43 43 3 V A13 GND A44 AD15 B13 GND B44 C BE1_L A14 RESERVED A45 3 3V B14 RESERVED B45 AD14 A15 RESET L A46 AD13 B15 GND B46 GND A16 5V A47 AD11 B16 CLK B47 AD12 A17 GRANT L A48 GND B17 GND B48 AD10 A18 GND A49 AD9 B18 REQ_L B49 GND A19 RESERVED A50 KEY B19 5V B50 KEY A20 AD30 A51 KEY B20 AD31 B51 KEY A21 3 3 V A52 C BEO_L B21 AD29 B52 AD8 A22 AD28 A53 3 3 V B22 GND B53 AD7 A23 AD26 A54 AD6 B23 AD27 B54 3 3V A24 GND A55 AD4 B24 AD25 B55 AD5 A25 AD24 A56 GND B25 3 3 V B56 AD3 A26 IDSEL A57 AD2 B26 C BE3_L B57 GND A27 3 3 V A58 ADO B27 AD23 B58 AD1 A28 AD22 A59 5V B28 GND B59 5V A29 AD20 A60 REQ64_L B29 AD21 B60 ACK64 L A30 GND A61 5 V B30 AD19 B61 5 V A31 AD18 A62 5V B31 3 3 V B62 5V The cross symbol after the signal indicates that the slot serves 5 V compliant devices only 205 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 64 bit PCI Connector For pins Al A62 and B1 B62 the 64 bit PCI connector is identical to the 32 bit PCI connector The table below shows the additional extension pins for the 64 bit PCI connector Pin Signal Pin Signal A63 GND Ground B63 RESERVED A64 C BE7_L B64 GND A65 C BE5_L B65 C BE6_L A66 5 V B66 C BE4_L A67 PAR64 B67 GND A68 AD62 B68 AD63 A69 GND B69 AD61 A70 AD60 B70 5 V A71 AD58 B71 AD59 A72 GND B72 AD57 A
108. _L FD_STEP_L FD_WDATA_L FD_WGATE_L FD_TRKO_L FD_WPROT_L FD_RDATA_L FD_HDSEL_L FD_DSKCHG_L 281 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide IDE Connector J4 Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 RESET 2 GND 3 DD7 4 DD8 5 DD6 6 DD9 7 DD5 8 DD10 9 DD4 10 DD11 11 DD3 12 DD12 13 DD2 14 DD13 15 DD1 16 DD14 17 DDO 18 DD15 19 GND 20 KEYPIN NC 21 DMARQ 22 GND 23 DIOW 24 GND 25 DIOR 26 GND 27 IORDY 28 CSEL 29 DMACK 30 GND 31 INTRQ 32 RESERVED 33 DA1 34 PDIAG 35 DAO 36 DA2 37 CSO 38 CS1 39 DASP 40 GND 282 Chapter 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Description Wide SCSI Connector J5 Pin Signal S1 DB 12 S2 DB 13 S3 DB 14 S4 DB 15 S5 DB P1 S6 DB 0 S7 DB 1 S8 DB 2 S9 DB 3 10 S10 DB 4 11 11 DB5 12 S12 DB 6 ONO aA fF WwW DY Kei 13 S13 DB 7 14 S14 DB P 15 S15 16 16 DIFFSENS 17 S417 TERMPWR 18 18 TERMPWR 19 19 RESERVED 20 S20 21 S21 ATN 22 22 23 823 BSY 24 824 HACK 25 825 RST 26 S26 MSG 27 S27 SEL 28 S28 C D 29 S29 REQ 30 S30 1 O 31 S31 DB 8 32 S32 DB9 33 S33 DB 10 34 34 DB 11 Pin 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 S68 Signal S35 DB 12 S36 DB 13 S37 DB 14 S38 DB 15 S39 DB P1 S40 DB 0 S41 DB 1 S42 DB 2 S43 DB 3 S44 DB 4
109. _L 15 GND XOCLK GND CTS_TTL_FP RI_TTL_FP ISP_SDO INTRUSION_L ISP_SDI VCC_STDBY 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND X1D_L 0 Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 Signal GND XIMB_SOUT_EN GND IO_TDI GND CPU_SPI_RESET_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 3 GND IGNNE_L GND XOXRTS_L GND X0D_L 2 GND X0D_L 5 GND X0D_L 7 GND X0D_L 10 GND X0D_L 13 GND GND DVALIDA_L DOFF1_L GND RTS_TTL_FP GND FAN_FAILED GND VCC_STDBY GND 12C_DS2P_SDA GND Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 Signal GND SIN_TTL_COM2 IO TMS PWRGDB A20M_L PROC_RESET_L GND BMC_SPI_BUS 5 SMI_L 12C_ GLOBAL_SDA GND XOHRTS_L GND XOBE_L 0 GND XOPAR_L GND XOADS_L XOD_L 11 XOBE_L 1 XOXSTBN_L GND DOFFO_L GND DSR_TTL_FP GND ISP_FPC_SDO GND DTR_TTL_FP SPEAKER_DATA GND HARD_RESET GND 12C_DS2P_SCL GND Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 continued 201 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Expander Bus Connector Signal Section A B amp C continued Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin X1D_L 1 A3
110. _RTC_L GND PS_PWR_ON DSR_TTL_FP 12C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC CTS_TTL_FP 12C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC_A 12C_FPC_SCL 12C_FPC_SDA GND GND 12C_BACKUP_SDA VCC_STDBY VCC_STDBY Reserved Pin 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Signal GND Reserved Reserved Reserved GND PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L SOUT_TTL_COM2 GND PWR_GOOD DCD_TTL_FP GND Reserved Reserved RI_TTL_FP Reserved RTS_TTL_FP DTR_TTL_FP 12C_BACKUP_SCL VCC_STDBY VCC_STDBY GND Pin 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 231 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory This chapter describes the memory module and tells how to populate the DIMM sockets on the memory module Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Module Features Memory module e Up to 4 GB of ECC memory using sixteen 72 bit dual inline memory modules DIMMs e 60ns and 50 ns 3 3 V buffered EDO DRAM e Four way interleaving e A minimum configuration of 128 MB using four 32 MB DIMMs e Supports buffered DIMMs with capacities of 32 64 and 256 MB e Provides server management data with an onboard EEPROM including thermal monitoring FRU information and presence detect bit access e Can act as a memory terminator module when no
111. act S E C cartridge the baseboard supports two memory modules The cartridge includes the processor core and L2 cache components Each memory module supports up to 4 GB of ECC memory using sixteen 72 bit dual inline memory modules DIMMs The CPU baseboard requires two memory modules one must contain DIMMS continued 19 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Server Features continued Feature PHP UO baseboard I O riser card Midplane Front side bus FSB terminator module Peripheral bay backplane 20 Comment One 16 bit ISA expansion slot shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with a 32 bit PCI slot you can use the shared slot for either ISA or PCI but not both Six 32 bit PCI expansion slots one of them shares a common chassis I O expansion slot with the ISA slot you can use the shared slot for either PCI or ISA but not both Four 64 bit PCI hot plug expansion slots Integrated Cirrus Logic GD5446 VisualMediat PCI super video graphics array SVGA controller with 2 MB of video memory The Symbiost 53C896 LVDS SCSI controller supports two LVDS channels One channel controls internal devices such as CD ROMs tape and DVDs drives in addition to the two hard drives in the peripheral bay The other channel provides a connection to external devices The diskette controller supports one drive The PCl enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics IDE interface supports one IDE bus PS 2t c
112. adjusts the volume of headphones or speakers F Cooling fault LED yellow G Drive fault LED yellow H Front panel LCD SCSI drive hot docking bays Status LEDs for SCSI Drives in Hot docking Bays J Drive fault LED yellow K Drive activity LED green L Drive power LED green CD ROM Drive M Open close button N Activity LED O Volume control P Headphone jack 3 5 inch Floppy Diskette Drive Q Activity LED R Ejector button 24 It provides a connection for headphones or speakers When lit it indicates the drive is in use When pressed it ejects the diskette Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server ABC DEFG H LKJ OM07344 Figure 1 5 Server Controls and Indicators 25 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Server Security There are several ways to prevent unauthorized entry or use of the server Security with the Setup utility e Set server administrative and user passwords e Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel controls Security with the System Setup Utility SSU e Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keyboard and mouse after a specified time out period 1 to 128 minutes e Set an administrative pa
113. ads from a diskette place the diskette containing the OS files in drive A Turn on the server If the power LED does not light refer to Power Light Does Not Light on page 266 Monitoring POST 264 See Chapter 3 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights As POST determines the server configuration it tests for the presence of each mass storage device installed in the server As each device is checked its activity light should turn on briefly Check for the following Q Does the diskette drive activity light turn on briefly If not refer to Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light on page 268 Q If there is a hard disk drive or a SCSI device installed in the server does the drive activity light on the front panel turn on briefly If not refer to Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light on page 268 gt NOTE For information about the controls and indicators see Chapter 1 Confirming Loading of the Operating System Once the server boots up the operating system prompt appears on the screen The prompt varies according to the operating system If the operating system prompt does not appear refer to Initial Startup of the Server on page 262 Specific Problems and Corrective Actions This section provides possible solutions for the following specific problems e Power light does not light e Server cooling fans do not rotate or rotate slo
114. aids server startup during low AC input voltage conditions Valid AC Input JP1 Position Range AC Mains Brown Out Feature EES 200 240VAC or 15A Disabled 100 120V AC 15A Disabled memoues 200 240VAC 15A Enabled Enabling the brown out feature ensures that all power supplies will turn on when the AC input voltage reaches at least 180V AC following an AC main brown out condition Disabling the brown out feature can cause power problems when the system tries to recover from a brown out condition The problems that can result depend on server AC input voltages e For 100 120V AC input power after a brown out AC input voltage may slowly rise to its nominal level and because of slight differences in power supply turn on thresholds at 90V one power supply may turn on before the others This power supply will most likely see too large a DC load and shut down other power supplies may do the same removing all DC voltages from the server e For 200 240V AC input power after a brown out AC input voltage may slowly rise to its nominal level and the power supplies turn on at 90V doubling the current load on the AC main and causing them to trip e For power supply input voltages see Table 20 3 249 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Jumper JP1 Installing Removing See Figure 20 1 1 Shut down the server and disconnect it from its power source 2 Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removin
115. all SCSI drivers 37 install video drivers 37 major components 21 management 19 190 305 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 306 Server continued on site installation 29 wont boot from CD 38 Setup utility running 43 Specifications environmental 30 physical 30 SSU See system setup utility Status indicators drive activity LED green 24 drive fault LED yellow 24 drive power LED green 24 SCSI drives 106 Supplies 97 101 109 119 127 165 257 Switches DC power 261 262 NMI 24 power 24 reset 24 261 server power 110 system power 33 41 121 Symmetric multiprocessor 217 System setup utility 31 CFG files 58 customizing 60 defining an ISA card 63 exiting 74 launching a task 60 location 57 OVL files 57 removing an ISA card 64 running 59 locally 58 remotely 59 SCI files 58 when to run 57 T Tools 97 101 109 119 127 165 257 Troubleshooting additional procedures 264 application software 269 beep codes 267 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 checklist 262 263 cooling fans 266 DC power switch 262 floppy drive light 268 hard drive light 268 initial system startup 262 new software 263 no characters on screen 267 operating system prompt 265 power distribution backplane 269 screen characters incorrect 267 server lights 265 server problems 263 checklist 263 specific problems corrective actions 265 power light 26
116. and lift the board from the chassis 6 Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the Front Panel Board See Figure 13 9 CAUTION When positioning the front panel board for reinstallation be sure its switches are in the sheet metal holes before mating its connector with the CPU baseboard If the switches are not in the holes they may be damaged Position the front panel board over threaded standoffs on the chassis Push the board horizontally to mate the connector with the CPU baseboard connector Insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the board is properly positioned and tighten all screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier Reinstall the LCD module as described earlier Reinstall the insulating material removed earlier from the front panel board Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier SOOO Ay ein AUS Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 OM07322 Figure 13 9 Front Panel Board A CPU baseboard connector B LCD data connector C LCD power connector 143 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide CPU Baseboard Removing the CPU Baseboard See Figure 13 10 EAN DE Observe the pr
117. and J24D J21B Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 12V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 12V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 12V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 12V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 12V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 12V P2E3 3 3V J21C Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 3 3V J21D Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 3 3V J24B Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 3 3V 229 AC450NX Rack Server System Pro
118. ane Place the midplane on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the Midplane 1 2 REIN AR Remove the midplane from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Position the midplane on its support bracket and insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the midplane is properly positioned and tighten all screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall the midplane and its support bracket in the chassis Reinstall the upper midplane support bracket Reinstall the I O Tray as described earlier Reinstall the CPU baseboard tray as described earlier Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling AC Filter and Cable Removing the AC Filter and Cable 158 NEID Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the CPU tray as described earlier Remove the VO Tray as described earlier Remove and save the screws that attaches the AC filter tray to the chassis Remove and save the screws that attaches the three AC plugs to the chassis Remove the three plug retaining brackets Remove the AC filter and cable Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Reinstalling the AC Filter and Cable 1 SON Qk Remove the AC filter and cable fr
119. as been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense gt NOTE If a Class A device is installed within this system then the system is to be considered a Class A system In this configuration operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices International 286 CORE RER EE EARS VCCI ORM CEJA ARE COMBERERR CERT Z EBE bald Eng COBARDES SLIBRENSTEMSNET English translation of the notice above This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may arise When such trouble occurs the user may be required to take corrective actions Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites bruits radio lectriques ap
120. ating systems applications and drivers It may also be necessary to modify resources to resolve a conflict 64 e To modify the resources associated with a device 1 2 Highlight the device in the Devices section of the RCA window Press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or double click on the entry This displays the functions of the selected device along with possible choices and the resources associated with those choices e To make a modification 1 2 gt Highlight the function in the Configuration window Press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or double click on the entry this updates the Choice and resource lists Press the tab key to get to the Choice list and press lt Enter gt Use the arrow keys to select a proper choice and press lt Enter gt again If the choice allows multiple possible values for a particular resource use the hot key to select a resource and press the spacebar or double click on the resource Select the desired resource and click on Ok Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run Baseboard Skstem Board Function System Group Extended Memory Options 0n Board Disk Controllers Group Cancel 0n Board Communication Devices Group Floppy Drives Group Floppy Drive A Options Help Floppy Drive B Options IDE Devices Group Racers lise Choice No choices Memory Figure 5 4 Configuration Window 65 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide System Resourc
121. ax Min Max Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current CPU baseboard with 4 6A 4 6A 800mA 6 2A 0 2A 28 5 A OA OA OA OA processors Front panel OA OA 50mA 2 23A 3 1A 4 0A 100mA 1 0A 1 mA 10 mA Total CPU 4 6 A 4 6 A 850 mA 8 4A 3 3 A 32 5 A 100mA 1 0A 1 mA 10 mA baseboard Total DRAM 8 GB 24A 27 2 A OA OA OA OA OA OA OA OA PHP I O baseboard 600mA 5A 600 mA 4 25 A OA 20 mA 5mA 500mA OA OA PCI ISA 4 5 6 7 OA 23A OA 35 68A OA SOA OA OA OA 1 0A UO riser card OA OA OA 70 mA OA 30 mA 5mA 150mA OA OA Total I O 600 mA 28A 600 mA 40A OA 5 05A 10 mA 650 mA OA 1 0 A baseboard A Total Current 9 2 A 59 8 A 1 5 A 48 4 A 3 3S 37 6A 110mA 17A 1mA 1 0A DRAM CPU and VO baseboards Total Power 304 W 197 3W 7 5W 242 W 39 6W 451 2W 055W 8 5W 0 01W 12W DRAM CPU and VO baseboards 1 Minimum server configuration one idle processor two VRMs three processor termination modules two memory modules totaling 128 MB DRAM no I O adapter cards front panel with system fans at low speed I O riser card no keyboard no mouse no video no parallel port connections and no bus activity 2 Maximum server configuration four 65 W processors six VRMs operating at 80 efficiency front panel with system fans at high speed I O riser card keyboard mouse video parallel port connected two memory modules with 8 GB DRAM and all I O adapter slots filled See notes 3 8 Maximized
122. bus activity Current must not exceed 7 58 A 25 W per PCI slot or 23 A total for all PCI expansion slots on 3 3 V Current must not exceed 5 A 25 W per PCI slot or 35 68 A total for all expansion slots on 5 V Current must not exceed 2 A per ISA slot or 35 68 A total for all expansion slots on 5 V Current must not exceed 500 mA per PCI or ISA slot or 5 A total for all expansion slots on 12 V Current must not exceed 100 mA per slot or 1 0 A total for all expansion slots on 12 V oN o Om P OQ These values are included for reference only They are not included in the maximum configuration requirements 253 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Calculating Power Usage 254 Use the worksheets in Tables 20 4 and 20 5 to calculate the total DC power used by your server configuration The documentation that comes with each add in device should specify its current and voltage requirements To calculate the total combined wattage for your server do this 1 List the current for each board and device in the appropriate voltage level column in Table 20 4 2 Add the currents in each column of Table 20 4 and enter the total current for each column in Table 20 5 3 Multiply the voltage by the total current to get the total wattage for each voltage level 4 Add the total wattage for each voltage level to arrive at a total combined power usage on the power supply Table 20 4 Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage Cu
123. by technically qualified personnel Server Precautions A WARNING Server power on off The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug the AC power cord from the AC inlet filter Hazardous conditions power supply and power distribution backplane Hazardous voltage current and energy levels are present inside the power supply and the power distribution backplane There are no user serviceable parts inside them servicing should be done only by technically qualified personnel Hazardous conditions devices and cables Hazardous electrical conditions may be present on power telephone and communication cables Turn off the server and disconnect telecommunications systems networks modems and each power cord attached to the server before opening it Otherwise personal injury or equipment damage can result Avoid injury The minimum server configuration weighs 51 4 kg 113 Ibs and the maximum one weighs 60 kg 132 Ibs To avoid injury we recommend that a lift be used to insert the server into the slide assemblies in the equipment rack 115 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide CAUTION Electrostatic discharge ESD and ESD protection ESD can damage disk drives add in boards and other components This server can withstand normal levels of environmental ESD while you are hot swapping hard disk drives and power su
124. ce gt NOTE If you are installing or removing an ISA add in board you must run the SSU to reconfigure the server Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add in board Installing an Add in Board See Figures 13 11 13 12 and 13 13 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling gt NOTE The 64 bit PCI hot swap expansion slots also have a power enabling switch actuator This actuator must be installed unless override is set in the BIOS setup or an expansion board is installed The actuator is held in place by the expansion slot cover screw 3 Select the appropriate 16 bit ISA 32 bit PCI or 64 bit PCI expansion slot Remove and save the expansion slot cover and if installed the power enabling switch actuator 146 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07319 Figure 13 11 PHP I O Baseboard Expansion Slots A 16 bit ISA slot B 32 bit PCI slots C 64 bit hot swap PCI slots VAY M i IS OM07337 Figure 13 12 Expansion Slo
125. d component side down Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Removing an Add in Board CAUTION Expansion slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots to maintain the electromagnetic emission characteristics of the server and to ensure proper cooling of the server components See Figures 13 11 13 12 and 13 13 1 2 RES 10 11 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Disconnect any cables attached to the board you are removing Remove and retain the screw securing the add in board to the expansion slot frame Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners and carefully pull it toward you until the edge connector of the board pulls free from the connector on the PHP I O baseboard Make sure that you do not scrape the board against other components Store the board in an antistatic protective wrapper Install an expansion slot cover Figure 13 12 over the vacant slot The tapered foot of the cover must fit into the mating slot in the bottom of the expansion slot frame If this is a 64 bit hot swap slot install the power enabling switch actuator over the vacant slot The spring at the end of the actuator rests on the power enabling switch Secure the expansion slot cover and the actuator to the expansion slot frame using the expansion slot cover retaining screw
126. des version information 83 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Server Control Operations Three server control operations are available from the menu or toolbar in EMP Console remote server connection powering the server on and off and resetting the server The server console mode can also be switched between EMP active and BIOS redirect modes through post power up and reset options Connect When Re Connect is selected from the Connect menu the Connect dialog in Figure 7 3 is displayed This dialog allows you to connect to a server If the client machine is already connected to a server initiating connection generates a warning message The message indicates that the existing connection will be terminated if you continue trying to initiate the new connection You are prompted to enter the EMP password whenever a connection is attempted r Line selection Serial line Dial up 8 Bit No parity 1 stop bit Direct connect Serial Line Config Baud Rate 19200 m Dial up Cancel Server Deg COM Port No fi S Help Figure 7 3 Connect Dialog Options available in the dialog are e Line Selection you can specify whether to use a direct connection or dial up modem connection to the server Dial up connects to a selected server with a modem Direct connect Serial Line connects to the selected server directly using a null modem serial cable e Server a
127. described in Chapter 12 133 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07361 Figure 13 4 Memory Module 134 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Front Side Bus Terminator Module The CPU baseboard provides four slot 2 connectors for processors packaged in S E C cartridges If any slot 2 connector is depopulated a terminator module must be installed in the connector to properly terminate the signals on the front side bus FSB For example if only two slots are populated with processors you need FSB terminator modules in the two unpopulated processor slots The terminator modules are housed in plastic covers Removing a Terminator Module See Figure 13 5 1 2 3 4 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Loosen the holddown bracket captive screw and remove the holddown bracket Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers of the terminator module outward to eject the module out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard Slide the module out of the slot guides and place it component side down on a nonconductive static free surface Reinstalling a Terminator Module See Figure 13 5 1 2 e Grasp the terminator module by the eject insert levers and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides Simu
128. disengage the tabs along the front of the cover from the top cover Remove the cover and set it aside 123 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07357 Figure 12 5 PCI Bus Hot Plug Cover Reinstalling the PCI Bus Hot Plug Cover 124 See Figure 12 5 1 2 Ensure that add in boards are firmly seated in their respective slots Position the cover over the top cover so that the tabs along its edges align with the slots in the top cover Lower the cover until it rests on the top cover Push the cover toward the server front to seat the tabs along the cover front with the top cover Attach the cover to the top cover with the two screws and tighten them firmly 6 0 inch pounds Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Removing the Fan Array Assembly Cover NEED Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the front bezel as described earlier Remove the top cover as described earlier Remove and save the screw that secures the fan array assembly cover to the chassis Slide the cover forward to free it from the securing tab Remove the cover Reinstalling the Fan Array Assembly Cover 1 2 ON ee Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Place cover in position over the fan array Ensure that the tabs interlock with the fan array assembly Lower cover and slide it to the rear so that it engages locking tabs Secure the cover screw r
129. duct Guide Power Connectors J21B J21C J12D J24B DAC and DAD continued J24C Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 5V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 5V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 5V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 5V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 5V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 5V J24D Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 5V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 5V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 5V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 5V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 5V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 5V Front Panel Connector Front Panel Connector J32 Signal Pin Signal Pin GND 1 GND 41 12V 2 12V 42 12V 3 12V 43 GND 4 GND 44 GND 5 GND 45 12V 6 12V 46 12V 7 12V 47 SPEAKER_DATA 8 GND 48 ISP_SCLK 9 GND 49 FAN_FAILED_L 10 5V 50 GND 11 ISP_SDI 51 ISP_FPC_EN_L 12 5V 52 FP_TO_PIIX_PWRBTN 13 ISP_MODE 53 ISP_FPC_SDO 14 5V 54 Reserved 15 Reserved 55 COM2_TO_FP_EN 16 5V 56 COM2_TO_SIO_EN_A 17 PROC_RESET_L 57 GND 18 Reserved 58 SECURE_MODE_BMC 19 XIMB_SOUT_EN 59 continued 230 Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Front Panel Connector J32 continued Signal HARD_RESET FP_NMI_SWT_L SIN_TTL_COM2 SIN_TTL_XIMB GND SOUT_TTL_XIMB PWR_CNTRL
130. e MB only Autosize cache Configure advanced chip set registers Load alternate registers with new CMOS values Set initial new processor speed Initialize interrupt vectors Initialize BIOS interrupts Check ROM copyright notice Initialize manager for PCI Option ROMs Check video configuration against CMOS Initialize PCI bus and devices Initialize all video adapters in system Display QuietBoot screen Shadow video BIOS ROM Display copyright notice Display processor type and speed Test keyboard Set key click if enabled Enable keyboard Test for unexpected interrupts Display prompt Press F2 to enter SETUP Test RAM between 512 and 640k Test extended memory Test extended memory address lines Jump to UserPatch1 Configure advanced cache registers Enable external and processor caches Display external cache size Display shadow message Display nondisposable segments Display error messages Check for configuration errors Test real time clock Check for keyboard errors Test for key lock on Set up hardware interrupt vectors Test coprocessor if present continued 271 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 272 Port 80h Codes continued CP 80 82 85 86 88 8A 8C 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 98 9A 9C 9E AO A2 A4 A8 AA AC AE BO B2 B4 B5 B6 B8 BC BE BF Co DO D2 D4 Beeps Reason Detect and install external RS232 ports Detect and install external parallel ports Initialize PC compat
131. e screen At the end of POST if the lt Esc gt key was pressed a pop up boot menu is displayed It allows you to change the boot sequence or to enter Setup and permanently change the sequence Follow these steps to install these drivers 1 Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server the CD can be in the drive or not 2 When POST displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP 3 Press lt Esc gt and wait for the following boot menu to display Boot Menu Use lz or lt gt to select a boot device or the Setup utility Press lt Enter gt to accept or lt Esc gt to exit Diskette Drive Removable Devices Hard Drive ATAPI CD ROM Drive lt Enter Setup gt amp N H RARE Es OM08360 Figure 2 4 Boot Menu 4 From the boot menu select the CD ROM drive and press lt Enter gt 5 When you see the following pop up menu press lt Enter gt to boot from the CD CD ROM BOOT MENU 1 Hard Drive OM08361 Figure 2 5 CD ROM Boot Menu 38 Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server The server should now boot from the CD displaying a menu bar that includes creating diskettes diagnostics reading printing the manual and quitting to DOS A CAUTION If the server does not operate as described in this chapter contact a qualified service technician 39 3 Power on Self Test Description Running Power on
132. e Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing 15 Midplane Description Voltages 16 Peripheral Bay Backplane Description 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages 23 Front Panel Description Voltages 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Description A Regulatory Specifications B Equipment Log C Warnings 113 Safety Guidelines BEFORE YOU REMOVE SERVER COVERS OBSERVE THESE GUIDELINES 1 2 Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server Turn off DC power in the server by pressing the push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server Disconnect AC power to the server by unplugging the alternating current AC power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I O panel on the back of the server Provide some electrostatic discharge ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground of the server any unpainted metal surface when handling components Warnings and Cautions These warnings and cautions apply whenever you remove the top and side covers of the server to access components inside it Integration of the server should be done only
133. e SSU Main window See System Setup Utility Main Window on page 61 2 Click on Exit or Highlight Exit and press lt Enter gt 74 6 SCSI Configuration Utility The SCSI configuration utility allows you to configure view the settings of the host adapters and devices in the server For information about the SCSI Configuration Utility refer to the PCI SCSI Device Manager System Users Guide 75 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use The Emergency Management Port EMP Console provides an interface to the Emergency Management Port EMP This interface allows remote server management via a modem or direct connection The server control operations available with EMP Console are e Connecting to remote servers e Powering the server on or off e Resetting the server The EMP Console uses three management plug ins to monitor the server e SEL Viewer not available on AC450NX servers e SDR Viewer not available on AC450NX servers e FRU Viewer The EMP Console also has a Phonebook plug in that can be used to create and maintain a list of servers and their phone numbers 77 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide How EMP Console Works 78 The EMP shares use of the COM 2 port with the system on the server When the EMP has control of the port the port operates in command mode When the system has control the port operates in console redirect mode When connecting to a server the EMP Console checks t
134. e SSU from the Server Configuration Software CD to diskettes and follow the instructions in the README TXT of diskette one See Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server to create a set of SSU diskettes Only diskette one of the set must be DOS bootable gt NOTE If your diskette drive is disabled or improperly configured you must use the flash resident Setup utility to enable it so that you can use the SSU If necessary you can disable the drive after you exit the SSU Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup Running the SSU 58 e Running the SSU Locally Running the ssu bat file provided on the SSU media starts the SSU If the server boots directly from the SSU media the ssu bat file runs automatically If it boots from a different media the SSU can be started manually or by another application When the SSU starts in the local execution mode the default mode the SSU accepts input from the keyboard and or mouse The SSU presents a VGA based Graphical User Interface GUI on the primary monitor The SSU runs from writable nonwritable removable and nonremovable media If you run the SSU from nonwritable media all your preference settings will be lost because you cannot save them The SSU supports the ROM DOS V6 22 operating system It can run on other ROM DOS compatible operating systems but they are not supported The SSU will not operate from a DOS box running under an operati
135. e Usage Clicking on the Resource Use button in the Configuration window displays the System Resource Usage window This window shows what resources each device is consuming This information is useful for choosing resources if a conflict occurs Devices can be organized according to the resources you want to examine using the options in the Resource section of the screen The resource information can also be written to a plain text file though this window 66 Relburce List 0 1 3 4 6 8 3 Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard Baseboard System system System System System System System System Board Board Board Board Board Board Board Board PCI Card Bus 00 Dev OF PCI Card Bus 00 Dev 12 Resource IRQ DMA Ports Memory All d f d Timer Chipset Serial Port 2 Configuration Serial Port 1 Configuration On Board Floppy Controller Parallel Port Configuration RTC ACPI SCI Interrupt Ethernet Controller Ethernet Controller Multifunction Controller USB Controller Dump to File Figure 5 5 System Resource Usage Window Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run Multiboot Add in The Multiboot Add in MBA provides an interface for selecting Initial Program Load IPL devices Using the MBA you can identify all IPL devices in the system and prioritize their boot order On power up the BIOS seq
136. e desired expertise level novice intermediate expert The expertise level determines which tasks are visible in the Available Tasks section and what actions each task performs For a new mode setting to take effect the user must exit the SSU and restart it e Language this button lets you change the strings in the SSU to strings of the appropriate language For a new language setting to take effect you must exit the SSU and restart it e Other this button lets you change other miscellaneous options in the SSU The changes are instantaneous To change the interface default values Use the mouse to click on the proper button in the Preferences section of the SSU Main window or Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the desired button and press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or Access the menu bar with the mouse or hot keys Alt underlined letter Launching a Task 60 It is possible to have many tasks open at the same time although some tasks may require complete control to avoid possible conflicts The tasks achieve complete control by keeping the task as the center of operation until you close the task window To launch a task 1 In the SSU Main window double click on the task name under Available Tasks to display the main window for the selected task or Highlight the task name and click on OK or Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the task na
137. e installed in the connector to properly terminate the signals on the FSB Installing a Processor See Figures 13 5 1 2 3 4 mi 8 9 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the processor cartridge or terminator module as described earlier Being careful not to touch the gold edge connector on the processor cartridge remove it from the protective wrapper Place the cartridge heat sink side up on a nonconductive static free surface Record the serial number of the cartridge in your equipment log Grasp the cartridge by the eject insert levers and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the cartridge to seat the cartridge into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard Insert the hook end of the holddown bar in the flange of the right slot guide Tighten the captive screw 10 Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 137 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide DC to DC Converter VRM VRM in connector Provides power for Description J1 Processor 1 Processor core power only J2 Processor 1 and 2 L2 Cache power only J3 Processor 2 Processor core power only J4 Processor 3 Processor core power only J5 Processor 3 and 4 L2
138. ecautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the CPU tray as described earlier Remove the front panel board as described earlier Remove the terminator modules as described earlier Remove the processors as described earlier Remove the screws in the base of the processor retention module Remove the module it comes out as one unit and set it aside Remove the DC to DC converters as described earlier Lift the baseboard to unsnap it from the snap on standoffs Place the baseboard on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard See Figure 13 10 144 1 2 3 Mia ch ON LA Remove CPU baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Position the baseboard over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the CPU tray Press the baseboard onto the snap on standoffs and insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Position the processor retention module over the CPU baseboard and loosely insert the retaining screws into the threaded standoffs Make sure the baseboard is properly seated and then tighten all screws to 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall the processors and any terminator modules as described earlier Reinstall DC to DC converters as described earlier Reinstall the front panel board as described earlier Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling
139. ed The ambient air temperature must drop to 28 C or the failing condition must be cleared before the FPC returns the fans to slow speed again When the ambient air temperature reads between 28 C and 30 C the fans remain at their current speed Table 23 1 Fan Speed Control Fan Failure Ambient Air Temperature No lt 28 C Yes lt 28 C No gt 30 C Yes gt 30 C Fan Speed Slow Fast Fast Fast Voltage Low High High High Speaker Either the FPC or the PHP I O baseboard can control the speaker on the front panel board 12C Bus The private DC bus monitors failures and voltage margining in the server The 5 V standby voltage provides power for the bus and it is available even when server power is off 278 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Description This chapter describes the peripheral bay blindmate board Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Features The peripheral bay blindmate board provides power and signal interconnection from the midplane and PHP I O baseboard to the system peripheral devices diskette drive and CD ROM drive and the disk backplane Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors OM07329 Figure 24 1 P
140. ed earlier Remove all PCI hot plug expansion slot power switch activators and covers Remove the add in boards as described earlier Remove the plastic divider and base Remove and save the screws that attach the PHP I O baseboard to the tray Pull the board toward you to unsnap it from the snap on standoffs Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the PHP I O Baseboard See Figure 13 17 1 2 VIANA Remove the PHP I O baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Position the baseboard over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the center bulkhead of the chassis Press the baseboard onto the snap on standoffs and install the plastic divider and base Insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the baseboard is properly seated and tighten all screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall the 1 O board as described earlier Reinstall the 1 O riser card Reinstall the ICMB board as described earlier Connect all internal cables to the PHP 1 O baseboard 10 Reinstall the add in boards in their original expansion slots as described earlier 11 Connect all internal cables that go to the add in boards installed in the expansion slots 156 12 13 14 15 Reinstall all PCI hot plug expansion slot power switch activators and covers in their original positions Reinstall the top and P
141. ed it in one Position the board over the snap on and threaded standoffs on the I O Tray Press the board onto the snap on standoff and insert the screw loosely into the threaded standoffs Make sure the board is properly aligned and tighten the screw firmly 8 0 inch pounds Connect the signal cable to connector J1 on the I O riser card Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 a cc thee D E gt E cc N E o E o o E o O gt he o Ku o e KES AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide PHP UO Baseboard CAUTION The PHP I O baseboard can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always requires careful handling After removing the baseboard from the server place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface to prevent shorting out the battery leads If you place the baseboard on a conductive surface the back up battery leads may short out If they do this will result in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery Do not slide the baseboard over any surface Removing the PHP I O Baseboard See Figure 13 17 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the I O Tray as described earlier Remove the I O riser card as described earlier Remove the ICMB board as describ
142. ed when controlled by the OS Set the base I O address for serial port A Set the interrupt for serial port A continued Advanced Menu continued Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Feature Serial Port B Base I O Address Interrupt Parallel Port Mode Interrupt Diskette Controller Base I O Address Advanced Chip Set Control Address Bit Permuting Card to Card Interleave Option Disabled Enabled Auto 3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8 IRQ3 IRQ4 Disabled Enabled Auto Output only Bidirectional EPP ECP IRQ5 IRQ7 Disabled Enabled Auto Primary Secondary Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Description Configure serial port B using these options e Disabled no configuration e Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the base I O address for serial port B Set the interrupt for serial port B Configure the parallel port using these options e Disabled no configuration e Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the mode for the parallel port Set the interrupt for the parallel port Configure the diskette controller using these options e Disabled no configuration e Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Contr
143. ee Figures 12 1 and Figure 12 2 The server comes with several removable covers e The plastic snap on front bezel provides user friendly system controls and indicators e The plastic snap on peripheral bay cover provides access to the peripheral bay You must remove the front bezel before you can remove this cover e The top cover provides access to the CPU baseboard I O baseboard and PCI bus regular slot cover You must remove the top cover before you can remove the PCI bus regular slot cover e The PCI bus hot plug cover provides assess to the PCI bus hot plug slots e The fan array cover provides access to the 6 fan array It can be opened without removing the top cover e The memory module cover provides access to the two memory modules CAUTION For proper cooling and airflow do not operate the server with the covers removed Always reinstall them before turning on the server 119 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07302 Figure 12 1 Server Covers A B C D Memory module cover Fan array cover Top cover PCI hot plug cover Removing the Peripheral Bay Cover The peripheral bay cover is attached to the chassis with press in rivets and spring clips See Figure 12 2 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Grasp the peripheral bay cover handle and pull 3 Place the bezel on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Co
144. ely to fail because of a poorly performing fan running at a slower RPM than normal When the signal goes high the FPC warns the user about the upcoming failure but it does not shut down the power supply When the fault signal from the power supply goes low it indicates that the power supply has failed To clear the fault you must remove and reapply AC power to the power supply When the power on signal on the midplane goes high the power supplies power up if there is no 240 VA shutdown condition 5 V Quick Discharge 172 The quick discharge circuit speeds up discharging the 5 V bus after power is turned off The circuit starts discharging the bus as the voltage drops to around 1 V Chapter 15 Midplane Description Voltages Midplane Connectors OM07339 Figure 15 1 Midplane A Grand connector B Memory module connector J6 C Peripheral power connector J11 D Memory module connector J7 173 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Grand Connector 174 Pins on this connector extend through the midplane and connect with both the CPU baseboard and the PHP I O baseboard F16 and Front Panel Connector J3 Pins 1 On OO Om BB WO ND U Q QU 0 ND DN MM NYDN MM YN ch a a 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Bb O N O OF ABA NM 0 0 SG WO ND O 0 0 NO Tr ODN A COM2_TO_FP_EN IO_TCK IO_TDO BMC_SPI_BUS 1 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 BMC_SPI_BUS 0 GC
145. em properly loaded Refer to the operating system documentation Did you press the on off power switch on the front panel to turn the server on power on LED should be lit Is the power cord plugged into the AC inlet filter of the server and into a NEMA 5 15R outlet for 100 120 V or a NEMA 6 15R outlet for 200 240 V Chapter 2 Is AC power available at the wall outlet If these items are correct but the problem recurs refer to More Troubleshooting Procedures on page 264 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Running New Application Software Problems that occur when you run new application software are usually related to the new software Faulty equipment is much less likely especially if other software runs correctly Checklist a DOCDO Cove I FR Does the server meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software Refer to the software documentation Is the software an authorized copy If not get one unauthorized copies often do not work If you are running the software from a diskette is it a good copy If you are running the software from a CD is it scratched or dirty If you are running the software from a hard disk drive is the software correctly installed Were all necessary procedures followed and files installed Are the correct device drivers installed Is the software correctly configured for the server Are you using the software correctly the problems persist c
146. ement au type requis Notez que le commutateur CC de mise sous tension hors tension du panneau avant n teint pas l alimentation CA du syst me Pour mettre le syst me hors tension vous devez d brancher chaque cable d alimentation de sa prise CONSIGNES DE S CURIT Lorsque vous ouvrez le bo tier pour acc der l int rieur du syst me suivez les consignes suivantes 1 Mettez hors tension tous les p riph riques connect s au syst me 2 Mettez le syst me hors tension en mettant l interrupteur g n ral en position OFF bouton poussoir 3 D branchez tous les cordons d alimentation c a du syst me et des prises murales 4 Identifiez et d branchez tous les c bles reli s aux connecteurs d E S ou aux acc s derri re le syst me 5 Pour pr venir les d charges lectrostatiques lorsque vous touchez aux composants portez une bande antistatique pour poignet et reliez la la masse du syst me toute surface m tallique non peinte du bo tier 6 Ne faites pas fonctionner le syst me tandis que le bo tier est ouvert Une fois TOUTES les tapes pr c dentes accomplies vous pouvez retirer les panneaux du syst me Proc dez comme suit 1 Retirez toutes les vis des panneaux et mettez les dans un endroit s r 2 Retirez les panneaux Afin de permettre le refroidissement et l a ration du syst me r installez toujours les panneaux du bo tier avant de mettre le syst me sous tension Le fonctionnement du
147. emory module in the two memory module configuration except when only four DIMMs are used In that case all four DIMMs are on the primary memory module installed in primary connector on the midplane e All DIMMs on a memory module are identical in size and speed e DIMMs may differ in size and speed between memory modules However the maximum data transfer rate can only be provided when the banks of each module are configured identically through module to module interleaving as indicated in the rules below To take advantage of address bit permuting ABP which increases memory access performance across sequential cache line accesses the following rules must be followed e All banks that are used must be populated with four DIMMs e There must be a power of two banks populated 2 4 8 or 16 e All banks in an ABP group two banks in 2 bank permuting or four banks in 4 bank permuting must be the same size e All populated banks must be adjacent and start at bank 0 e When it is required that both memory modules be in the server both must be configured to allow equivalent ABP settings For example the chip set cannot support 2 bank permuting on one module and 4 bank permuting on the other To take advantage of module to module interleaving which provides maximum performance across sequential cache line accesses the following rules must be followed e All ABP rules above must be followed e Two memory modules must used and corres
148. emoved earlier Reinstall the top cover as described earlier Reinstall the front bezel as described earlier Removing the Memory Module Cover See Figure 12 6 1 2 3 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the front bezel as described earlier Loosen the four captive screws securing the memory module cover and remove the cover 125 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07353 Figure 12 6 Memory Module Cover Reinstalling the Memory Module Cover See Figure 12 6 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Place the cover in position and tighten the four captive screws to secure the cover 3 Reinstall the front bezel as described earlier 126 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall major server components Because the CPU baseboard is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis and the PHP I O baseboard is mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis the procedures start with the covers and end up with the baseboards Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Tools and Supplies You Need Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit Small flat bladed screwdriver Ant
149. ems With Application Software u44ssssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 269 Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down 269 Error Codes and Messages se 269 POrL 80N GOdES en rare een 270 POST Error Codes and Messages 273 23 Front Panel Description Voltages Warnings and Cautions u see 277 Front Nel BOI DEE 277 Fan Speed Control Voltage en un nn aan dann rn angehen 278 e 278 EEN ie EE EE Eege 278 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board Description Warnings and Cautions E 279 e 279 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors AA 279 Blind Mate Connector ds nn Rd en ee te een nee Smet 280 Seet 281 Diskette Connector ee ege EE Ade ee 281 IDE Connector d t Seite een ein 282 Wide SE SI COME Ja een 283 xii Contents A Regulatory Specifications Declaration 01 Compliance Zanker RR 285 Salely Compliance sat id 285 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMO ss 285 Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice USA 286 Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices International ooononnnnnconononnccccnnncnnnnnnnnnns 286 B Equipment Log Eq pment e BEE 287 C Warnings WARNING English US tii 290 AVERTISSEMENT Prana stats tests 292 WARNUNG e EE 294 AVVERTENZA Italiano eege 296 ADVERTENCIAS Espa ol cocina ee I 298 Index Figures 1 1 High performance Sven tea 17 1 2 Chassis Board Set een ein Bern er 21 1 3 Chassis Front Vi Wisin aaa eee dae asta 22 1 4 Chassis Rear View 23 1 5 Server Cont
150. ents a sensor one sensor for each instrumented device in the server If the given display function fails because of an inability to parse the data present or a hardware failure the utility displays an error message and exits Displaying DMI Area Each DMI area displayed is headed with the DMI area designated name In each area each field has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number Example To display the DMI area type frusdr d dmi v p and press lt Enter gt A message similar to the following appears Displaying DMI Area System Information Type 1 8 bytes Manufacturer Intel Product AC450NX Server System Version ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number Z00418630 Board Information Type 2 8 bytes Manufacturer Intel Corp Product AC450NX Server System Version ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number 0123456789 Chassis Information Type 3 9 bytes Manufacturer Intel Type Main Server Chassis Version ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number Z00418630 Asset Tag Displaying FRU Area 92 The FRU area is displayed in ASCII format when the field is ASCH or as a number when the field is anumber Each FRU area displayed is headed with the FRU area designated name Each field has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number The Board Chassis and Product FRU areas end with an END OF FIELDS CODE that indicates there is no more data in this area The Internal Use area
151. er configured with three power supplies is under 12 amperes CAUTION Temperature The operating temperature of the server when installed in an equipment rack must not go below 5 C 41 F or rise above 35 C 95 F Extreme fluctuations in temperature can cause a variety of problems in your server Ventilation The equipment rack must provide sufficient airflow to the front of the server to maintain proper cooling It must also include ventilation sufficient to exhaust a maximum of 3 150 Btu s per hour for the server The rack selected and the ventilation provided must be suitable to the environment in which the server will be used 117 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall the server covers Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e Small flat bladed screwdriver e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Pen or pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU Covers S
152. eripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors A Bindmate connector J1 Power connector J2 Wide SCSI connector J5 Reserved J6 IDE connector J4 Diskette connector J3 NMmooywy 279 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Blind Mate Connector J1 Pins ON Oa why A SS SS PS SS Go Co oO WWW WW WWNHNNNN NN YN YN ch ch ch ch zb 2 72 rh ch O ON DOAK oz OO N Om BR D OO Jo Om So Mk OO ODN Da RW ND zz CO 280 A RESET 1 DD7 3 DMARQ 21 GND IORDY 27 DMACK 29 GND INTRQ 31 DA1 33 DASP 39 GND GND GND GND GND GND 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 12v 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V 5V Signals RESERVED 32 PDIAG 34 DA2 36 CSO 37 DAO 35 CS1 38 GND GND S68 DB 11 S34 DB 11 S65 DB8 S31 DB 8 62 C D 28 C D 59 RST S25 RST S56 22 53 RESERVED S19 RESERVED 50 S16 DIFFSENS S47 DB 7 S13 DB 7 S44 DB 4 S10 DB 4 S41 DB 1 S7 DB 1 38 DB 15 S4 DB 15 35 DB 12 S1 DB 12 GND GND GND D GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
153. es Code 0002 0010 0015 0016 0042 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0060 0070 0080 0083 0085 0131 0132 0135 0140 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 0175 Error message Primary boot device not found Cache memory failure do not enable cache Primary output device not found Primary input device not found ISA Config contains invalid info PnP memory conflict PnP 32 bit memory conflict PnP IRQ conflict PnP DMA conflict PnP error log is full Bad PnP serial id checksum Bad PnP resource data checksum Keyboard is locked Please unlock it CMOS time amp date not set Option ROM has bad checksum Shadow of PCI ROM failed Shadow of ISA ROM failed Floppy drive A Floppy drive B Floppy disk controller failure Shadow of System BIOS Failed Disabled CPU slot CPU Failure CPU 1 CPU Failure CPU 2 CPU Failure CPU 3 CPU Failure CPU 4 CPU modules are incompatible or one is not present continued 273 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide POST Error Codes and Messages continued Code Error message 0176 Previous CPU Failure CPU 1 0177 Previous CPU Failure CPU 2 0178 Previous CPU Failure CPU 3 0179 Previous CPU Failure CPU 4 0180 Attempting to boot with failed CPU 0181 BSP switched system may be in uniprocessor mode 0191 CMOS battery failed 0195 CMOS system options not set 0198 CMOS checksum invalid 0289 System memory size mismatch 0295 Address line shor
154. es to resolve conflicts The system BIOS also uses the information to configure the hardware when the system boots 1 To add or remove ISA card resources click on the appropriate resource buttons select the desired value and click on Add or Remove 2 After you complete the necessary information click on Save 3 To edit a card click on Load to retrieve the card information After making changes click on Save 4 To create a card click on New 5 Toremove a current definition of a card click on Delete Define ISA Card Board Name Close Tune x Communications Device D Slot Help 8 Bit Slot E ec Resources Memory Save Load New Board Delete Board _ E e Figure 5 3 Define ISA Window 63 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Adding and Removing ISA Cards Adding and removing cards through the RCA provides a way for the RCA to run its conflict detection algorithms on the resources requested by the cards This alerts you to any possible problems with that particular card in the current configuration e To add an ISA card 1 2 3 Click on Add ISA Card in the RCA window Specify the directory for the CFG file Select the file and click on Ok e To remove an ISA card 1 2 Select a valid ISA card in the Devices section of the RCA window Click on Remove ISA Card Modifying Resources Modifying the resources of a device may be necessary to accommodate certain oper
155. ese devices in the order displayed Change the sequence and the drive lettering of a device by selecting it with the up and down arrow keys Press lt gt to move it up the list and press lt gt to move it down the list Press lt Esc gt to exit this menu Selects the maximum number of 120 drives that will be assigned a DOS drive letter All timeout values will be multiplied by this number Select enabled when you need to start the IRTOS manually When you hear three beeps POST has stopped Press any key to continue Exit Menu Selections Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run The following menu options are available on the Server menu Select an option by using the up or down arrow keys Then press lt Enter gt to execute the option and follow the prompts Option Exit Saving Changes Exit Discarding Changes Load Setup Defaults Load Custom Defaults Save Custom Defaults Discard Changes Save Changes Description Exit Setup and save your changes to CMOS Exit Setup without saving data to CMOS Load default values for all Setup items Load settings from custom defaults Save changes to custom defaults Normally PhoenixBios reads setup settings from CMOS However if CMOS fails it uses custom defaults if you have set them If not it uses factory defaults Load previous values from CMOS for all Setup items Save Setup data to CMOS 55 5 System Setup Utility When to Run The System Setup Utility SSU i
156. essing LBA However some operating systems may use the cylinder head sector CHS See your OS documentation for further help continued 47 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Advanced Menu continued Feature Pause Before Boot PCI Configurations PCI Device Embedded SCSI A Option ROM Scan Enable Master Latency Timer PCI Devices Option ROM Scan Enable Master Latency Timer I O Device Configuration Serial Port A Base I O Address Interrupt Option Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Default 0020h 0040h 0060h 0080h 00A0h 00C0h 00E0h Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Default 0020h 0040h 0060h 0080h 00A0h 00C0h OOEOh Disabled Enabled Auto 3F8 2F8 3E8 2E8 IRQ3 IRQ4 Description Pause five seconds before booting the OS Additional Setup menus to configure PCI devices Setup items for configuring the specific PCI device Initialize device expansion ROM Enable selected device as a PCI bus master Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in units of PCI bus clocks Initialize device expansion ROM Enable selected device as a PCI bus master Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in units of PCI bus clocks Configure serial port A using these options e Disabled no configuration e Enabled user configuration e Auto BIOS or OS chooses the configuration e OS Controlled display
157. ewer The FRU Viewer allows you to view the server s FRU Field Replaceable Unit data from the server s Front Panel FRU information area The options available in the FRU Viewer are View all FRU records View FRU summary info Set FRU display mode to either Hex or verbose mode Close the FRU Viewer Exit EMP Console FRU Viewer Menu Options The following menu options are found on the FRU Viewer menu bar 88 File Close closes the FRU Viewer Exit exits EMP Console View Display all Records displays all FRU data which consists of chassis board and product information FRU Info displays the FRU summary information as returned by the server Settings lets you change operating parameters for the FRU Viewer This menu displays the following options Display HEX Verbose toggles between HEX mode and interpreted mode of displaying FRU records Window gives options for displaying currently open windows Help Help Topics help topics for EMP Console Help About provides version information 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run The Field Replacement Unit FRU and Sensor Data Record SDR Load Utility is a DOS based program used to update the server management subsystem s product level FRU SDR and the Desktop Management Interface DMI nonvolatile storage components EEPROMs The load utility e discovers the product configuration based on instructions in a master c
158. field 3 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field To Change or Clear the Administrator Password 1 Click on the Administrator password button 2 Enter the old password in the first field 3 Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password 4 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password 68 Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run Security Options Under this window you can set the other security options e Hot Key set a key sequence that when pressed will drop the server into secure mode e Lock Out Timer set an interval that if no activity takes place during it will drop the server into secure mode e Secure Boot Mode force the server to boot directly into secure mode e Video Blanking turn off the video when the server is in secure mode e Floppy Write control access to the diskette drive while the server is in secure mode e Front Panel Lockout control the power and reset buttons while the server is in secure mode LLO system setup utinity Ta D Security BE i All security options require that a password be set for the system Admin Password User Password Options SC System Setup Utility Figure 5 7 Password Main Window 69 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide System Event Log Manager Add in 70 Clicking on the SEL Manger add in task brings up the SEL Manager
159. g Reinstalling 3 Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling 4 Install or remove the jumper 5 Reinstall the peripheral bay 6 Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 7 Reconnect the server to power and start the server OM07348 Figure 20 1 Jumper JP1 250 Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Power System The modular power system for the server is provided by up to three autoranging power supplies and a midplane When connected to 100 120VAC mains each power supply is capable of delivering 650 watts DC When connected to 200 240VAC mains each power supply is capable of delivering 750 watts DC The power system may be configured with two power supplies standard or three power supplies 2 1 redundant The power supplies are mounted in a 2 1 pattern in the back of the chassis along the bottom Each power supply has an integrated fan for cooling The midplane provides connectors for the hot swap power supplies The midplane is the DC power distribution hub providing connectors for the CPU baseboard memory modules I O baseboard and peripheral bay The midplane also provides the interface logic for power s
160. g the server power off The server requires a minimum of two power supplies LEDs on the back of the power supply indicate power on failure and predictive failure The electrogalvanized metal used in manufacturing the server chassis minimizes electromagnetic interference EMI and radio frequency interference RFI 3 5 inch diskette drive in the 3 5 inch bay 5 25 inch IDE CD ROM drive in the 5 25 inch half height bay Two 3 5 inch wide by 1 0 inch or 1 6 inch hot swappable LVDS hard disk drives mounted side by side in the 3 5 inch hot docking bays The hot docking bays allow hot swapping of hard disk drives without shutting down the server Three power supply bays populated with either two or three power supplies Ten I O expansion slot covers The plastic front bezel provides airflow and easy access to drives in the hot docking bays The removable top covers provide proper airflow and easy access to components inside the server A padlock not supplied on the back of the chassis secures the covers to prevent unauthorized entry into the server only technically qualified personnel should remove the server covers Six fans 5 1 cool and circulate air through the server The sixth fan is redundant The fans can be replaced hot swapped without turning the server power off An LED mounted next to each fan guarantees positive identification of the failed fan Integrated power supply fans two or three cool and circulate air t
161. ge PCI Card Bus 00 dev OD SCSI Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev OF Ethernet Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev 12 Multifunction Controller PCI Card Bus 00 dev 14 VGA Controller 3 To configure a device select its name in the Devices section of the RCA window and press the spacebar or lt Enter gt or double click on the name 4 Itis possible to close the RCA window and return to the AF by clicking on the Back to AF button Any changes made will be kept in memory for use by the RCA when it is rerun 5 Save all the changes made by clicking on the Save button Saving writes your current configuration to nonvolatile storage where it will be available to the system after every reboot 6 Closing the window by clicking on the system menu the dash in the upper left corner discards all changes E Host Processor Bridge SCSI Controller Ethernet Controller Multifunction Controller VGA Controller Define ISA Card Add ISA Card Figure 5 2 RCA Window 62 Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run Defining an ISA Card An ISA card usually comes with a vendor created CFG file that specifies the resources the card requires to function properly If the CFG file is unavailable you must manually create it or define the card through the SSU Defining an ISA card consists of specifying the name of the card and the resources it consumes This allows the RCA to consider the ISA card resource requirements when the RCA tri
162. hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Press lt Enter gt for options Pressing lt Enter gt attempts to detect the drive type for drives that comply with ANSI specifications User lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk drive installed at this connection Auto autotypes the hard disk drive installed here 1 39 lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive installed here CD ROM a CD ROM is installed here ATAPI Removable removable disk drive installed here Enabled allows 32 bit IDE data transfers Displays information about all processors You cannot modify any items in this menu Consult your system administrator if an item requires changing Stepping ID 2 L2 cache size 512 KB Stepping ID absent or disabled continued Main Menu continued Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to R
163. how to hot swap a server power supply When the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on you can determine which power supply is defective by checking the three status LEDs on the back of each power supply If a power supply fails the yellow FAIL LED on the back of the power supply will be on continuously You may hot swap the power supply remove and replace it with a good one If the server contains three power supplies you do not need to shut the server down to hot swap a failed power supply The LEDs on the power supply are e Green PWR Power LED when blinking AC is applied to the power supply and standby voltages are available When on continuously all power outputs are ready e Yellow FAIL Power Supply Failure LED when on continuously the power supply has failed and it may be replaced e Yellow PRFL Predictive Failure LED when blinking the power supply is about to fail in the near future due to the fan performing poorly The LED latches into a blinking state once the predictive failure condition occurs PWR power Power Supply Status Green No AC power Off AC in standby outputs on Blinking DC outputs on and okay On Power supply failure Off Current limit On Predictive failure On Power Supply LEDs FAIL power supply failure PRFL predictive failure Yellow Yellow Off Off Off Off Off Off On Off Blinking None Latch Off Off Blinking Latched Tools and Supplies You
164. hree push button switches control server power reset and NMI assertion Four LEDs indicate power on power supply failure hard drive failure and fan or other server cooling failure The LCD panel provides information about the server such as boot status available number of processors and other server management information The front panel board also allows other servers to communicate with this server even while power is down via an external Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB The ICMB is an extension of the internal ICMB A Phillips 80C652 microcontroller on the board controls all front panel functions while AC power is available The board connects to the rest of the server through a connector on the CPU baseboard All six system fans plug into hot plug connectors on the front panel board The microcontroller controls fan speed monitors fan tachometer outputs and indicates via LEDs one for each fan when fan failures occur The converter circuit converts 8 4 VDC to 12 VDC and provides over current protection 277 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Fan Speed Control Voltage The server fans operate at two speeds slow and fast The low voltage setting allows the fans to run at a slower speed to minimize acoustic noise under normal conditions When the Front Panel Controller FPC senses a fan failure or the ambient air temperature sensor reads 30 C or higher it sets the fan voltage to high to increase the fan spe
165. hrough the power supplies and the bottom of the chassis continued Server Features continued Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Feature Front panel board Server management CPU baseboard Pentium Il Xeon processor packaged in an S E C cartridge Memory module Comment The front panel board provides the user interface to the server The board allows other servers to communicate with this server even while power is down via an Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB Push button switches control power up reset and nonmaskable interrupt NMI functions LEDs indicate power on power supply failure hard drive failure or a fan or other server cooling failure An LCD panel provides information about boot status available number of processors and other server management information Interintegrated circuit bus 12C for diagnostic and intrachassis communication ICMB for interchassis platform management communications Real time clock calendar RTC Front panel controls and indicators LEDs Basic Input Output System BIOS Power on Self Test POST and Setup Utility stored in a flash memory device System Setup Utility SSU SCSI Configuration Utility Emergency Management Port EMP Utility Field Replacement Unit FRU and Sensor Data Record SDR Load Utility The baseboard supports up to four Pentium Il Xeon processors each processor is packaged in a Single Edge Cont
166. ible PnP ISA devices Reinitialize onboard I O ports Initialize BIOS Data Area Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area Initialize floppy controller Initialize hard disk controller Initialize local bus hard disk controller Jump to UserPatch2 Build MPTABLE for multiprocessor boards Disable A20 address line Install CD ROM for boot Clear huge ES segment register Search for option ROMs one long beep and two short beeps on checksum failure Shadow option ROMs Set up Power Management Enable hardware interrupts Set time of day Check key lock Initialize typematic rate Erase F2 prompt Scan for F2 key stroke Enter SETUP Clear in POST flag Check for errors POST done prepare to boot operating system One short beep before boot Display MultiBoot menu Check password optional Clear global descriptor table Clear parity checkers Clear screen optional Check virus and backup reminders Try to boot with INT 19 Interrupt handler error Unknown interrupt error Pending interrupt error continued Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Port 80h Codes continued CP D6 D8 DA DC FB FC FD Beeps Reason Initialize option ROM error Shutdown error Extended Block Move Shutdown 10 error FRB in progress Five second wait for BMC to initialize FRB 2 watchdog timer failed reset will occur in five seconds POST Error Codes and Messages The table below contains POST error codes and their associated messag
167. ic region or country The attachment plug must bear at least an accepted safety agency certification mark for the specific region or country The cord must be no longer than 4 5 meters 14 76 ft Turning on Your Server A WARNING The push button on off power switch on the front panel of the server does not turn off the AC power To remove AC power from the server you must unplug the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet 1 Make sure all external devices such as a video monitor keyboard and mouse optional have been connected 2 Remove drive protection cards if present from the removable media drives 3 Turn on your video monitor 4 Plug the female end of the power cord into the AC inlet filter receptacle on the back of the chassis 5 Plug the male end of the power cord into a properly grounded power outlet See page 29 for power outlet requirements 6 If the server does not come on when you plug the power cord into the power outlet press the power switch on the front panel 7 Verify that the power on light on the front panel is lit After a few seconds the power on self test POST begins See Power on Self Test on page 35 33 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 34 C DEFG H OM07334 Figure 2 2 Server Power and Reset Switches A zeonmoom Power switch
168. ide the fan array cover to the server front to free the cover from the locking tabs and lift the cover gt NOTE The fan array cover can be removed by first removing the top cover See Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 3 Look at the yellow fan failure LEDs to determine which fan is defective A WARNING The fan blade may still be rotating To avoid injury wait until it stops rotating before grabbing the fan with your free hand 4 Use the grasp holes and remove the defective fan 5 Set it aside 98 ei AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Replacing a Fan See Figure 9 1 1 Remove the new fan from the protective packaging 2 Record the model and serial numbers of the fan in your equipment log gt NOTE Fans are keyed and can only be inserted one way Be sure that the fan connector will mate with the front panel baseboard connector when aligning the fan in the fan cavity 3 Align the fan with the fan cavity 4 Lower the fan into the cavity 5 Replace the fan array cover and secure it with the screw removed earlier 100 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping Hot docking Bays Two 3 5 inch hot docking bays provide space for 3 5 inch wide by 1 inch high single connector attachment SCA SCSI hard disk drives You can install up to 2 industry standard wide fast 20 SCSI III SCA type hard disk drives in these bays The power supply fans provide c
169. ient memory to shadow PCI ROM Memory allocation failure for second PCI segment Floppy disk controller resource conflict Primary IDE controller resource conflict Secondary IDE controller resource conflict Parallel port resource conflict Serial port 1 resource conflict Serial port 2 resource conflict Expansion board disabled in slot NVRAM checksum error NVRAM cleared NVRAM data invalid NVRAM cleared I O expansion board NMI in slot Expansion board disabled in slot Fail safe timer NMI System reset caused by watchdog timer Bus time out NMI in slot Processor 0 failed BIST Processor 1 failed BIST Processor 2 failed BIST Processor 3 failed BIST Processor 0 internal error IERR Processor 1 internal error IERR Processor 0 thermal trip error Processor 1 thermal trip error Watchdog timer failed on last boot Processor 0 failed initialization Processor 0 disabled Processor 1 disabled Processor 0 failed FRB 3 timer Processor 1 failed FRB 3 timer Server management interface failed to function Processor 2 internal error IERR Processor 3 internal error IERR Processor 2 thermal trip error Processor 3 thermal trip error Processor 2 failed FRB 3 timer Processor 3 failed FRB 3 timer continued 275 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 276 POST Error Codes and Messages continued Code 8140 8141 8148 8149 814A 8150 8152 8153 8160 8161 8162 8163 8168 8169 816A 816B 8170 8171 8172 8173 8180
170. iguration Software to Diskettes When you copy software from the CD onto diskettes device drivers suitable for several different operating systems are copied onto the diskettes However your operating system will read only those drivers it can recognize so you cannot usually check the directory of a diskette that is not formatted for your operating system Instead you may see a message to the effect disk not formatted do you want to format it now Don t worry the drivers for YOUR operating system should be present on the diskette and available for you to load on the system 1 Before starting make sure that you have on hand several blank high density diskettes 2 From the CD ROM menu bar select Create Diskettes and press lt Enter gt 3 Follow the prompts to copy the software onto the diskettes 4 When finished select Quit to DOS on the CD ROM menu bar and press lt Enter gt 5 Remove the CD from the drive Installing Video Drivers After configuring the server you can install various video drivers to take full advantage of the enhanced features provided by the onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator The server may not operate properly without these drivers installed After copying the drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes read the README TXT file on the Display Drivers and DOS Utilities diskette The TXT file contains the most current information about which video drivers you need
171. install all terminator and processor modules as described earlier Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier Reinstall the memory modules as described earlier Reinstall the LCD module as described earlier Reinstall the top cover and memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07327 Figure 13 7 CPU Tray A Rear support Eject Insert levers Screws six Midplane Grand connector Front panel board am OO y 141 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07328 Figure 13 8 CPU Tray Support Rail Front Panel Board The front panel board contains the server controls and indicators It is mounted on snap on and threaded standoffs on the CPU Tray see Figure 13 7 Removing the Front Panel Board See Figure 13 9 1 2 3 4 142 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the CPU tray as described earlier Remove the insulating material from the front panel board Remove the nine screws and remove the board Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling CAUTION When the front panel board is free of the CPU board connector its switches are surrounded by sheet metal Be careful not to damage these switches when lifting the front panel board 5 Push pull the front panel board horizontally to free it from the CPU baseboard connector
172. is displayed in hex format 16 bytes per line Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Example To display the FRU area type frusdr d fru and press lt Enter gt A message similar to the following appears Common Header Area Version 1 Length 8 Header Area Version 01h Internal Area Offset 01h Chassis Area Offset 0Ah Board Area Offset OEh Product Area Offset 16h PAD 00h PAD 00h CHECKSUM DOh Internal Information Area Version 0 Length 72 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Chassis Information Area Version 1 Length 32 Chassis Type 11h Part Number ASCII ASDK128M1P2MBPP Serial Number ASCII 200418630 END OF FIELDS CODE Board Information Area Version 1 Length 64 Unicode Country Base 00h Manufacturing Time mins 733803 Manufacturer Name ASCII Intel Product Name ASCII AC450NX Server System Serial Number ASCII 0123456789 Part Number ASCII 664653 001 END OF FIELDS CODE 93 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Product Information Area Version 1 Length 80 Unicode Country Base 00h Manufacturer Name ASCII Intel Product Name ASCII AC450NX Server System Part Number ASCII ASDK128M1P2MBPP Version ASCII
173. ism 110 warning 110 Power system 18 251 Power usage calculating 254 worksheet 254 255 power brown out feature 249 Power on self test 35 41 Processor 19 installing 137 removing 137 R Real time clock 258 configuration settings 43 lithium battery 258 Recovery mode indicator SCSI drive 106 Regulatory specifications declaration of manufacturer 285 electromagnetic compatibility 285 international notices 286 USA notice 286 safety compliance 285 RFI 18 Index S Safety compliance 285 SCI files 58 SCSI hard disk drive 102 hot swapping 106 indicator drive in recovery mode 106 installing in hot docking bay 104 status indicator LED locations 107 status indicators 106 hot docking backplane 20 hot docking bays 101 installing drivers 37 peripheral bay hard disk drives 183 peripheral bay backplane fault indicators 183 ID addresses 184 indicator LEDs 183 power control 183 temperature sensor 183 singled ended devices 102 Security 26 boot sequence control 26 boot without keyboard 27 diskette write protect 27 emergency management port 27 locked power and reset switches 27 password protection 26 secure boot mode 26 setup utility 26 system setup utility SSU 26 video blanking 27 Server after unpacking 31 back panel 32 board set 17 boot from CD 36 chassis 18 cooling and airflow 119 copy software to diskettes 37 dimensions and weight 30 features 18 19 20 inst
174. istatic wrist strap recommended Pen or pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 127 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Fan Array Housing Removing the Fan Array Housing See Figures 13 1 and 13 2 1 2 gt Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover the fan array assembly cover and the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Use the grasp holes and remove all fan assemblies Remove and save the five screws that secure the housing to the chassis Remove the fan array housing Reinstalling the Fan Array Housing See Figures 13 1 and 13 2 1 25 3 4 128 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Reinstall the fan array housing ensuring that it engages with the support tabs Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws firmly 8 0 inch pounds Reinstall each fan assembly The fan assemblies are keyed and can only be installed if correctly oriented Reinstall the top cover the fan array assembly cover and the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling AC450NX Rack Server System Pr
175. ita e libera da particelle in sospensione a parte la normale polvere presente nell ambiente e Ben ventilata e lontana da fonti di calore compresa la luce solare diretta e Alriparo da urti e lontana da fonti di vibrazione e Isolata dai forti campi magnetici prodotti da dispositivi elettrici e In aree soggette a temporali consigliabile collegare il sistema ad un limitatore di corrente In caso di temporali scollegare le linee di comunicazione dal modem e Dotata di una presa a muro correttamente installata e Dotata di spazio sufficiente ad accedere ai cavi di alimentazione i quali rappresentano il mezzo principale di scollegamento del sistema 297 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide ADVERTENCIAS Espanol 298 El usuario debe abstenerse de manipular los componentes de la fuente de alimentaci n de este producto cuya reparaci n debe dejarse exclusivamente en manos de personal t cnico especializado Puede que este producto disponga de m s de una fuente de alimentaci n No intente modificar ni usar el cable de alimentaci n de corriente alterna si no corresponde exactamente con el tipo requerido N tese que el interruptor activado desactivado en el panel frontal no desconecta la corriente alterna del sistema Para desconectarla deber desenchufar todos los cables de corriente alterna de la pared o desconectar la fuente de alimentaci n INSTRUC
176. ite down the beep code you hear This information is useful for your service representative See Error Codes and Messages on page 269 5 Ifyou do not receive a beep code and characters do not appear the video monitor or video controller may have failed Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance eo S Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect Check the following Q Are the brightness and contrast controls properly adjusted on the video monitor Refer to the manufacturer s documentation Q Are the video monitor signal and power cables properly installed If the problem persists the monitor may be faulty or it may be the incorrect type Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Incorrect or no Beep Codes If the server operates normally but there was no beep the speaker may be defective Run the SSU to verify that the speaker is enabled Chapter 5 If the speaker is enabled but not functioning contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Record the beep code emitted by POST and refer to Error Codes and Messages on page 269 for information about beep codes and error messages 267 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light Check the following Are the power and signal cables to the diskette drive properly installed Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the diskette drive set correctly
177. its power and signal cables Remove and save the four screws and the two snap in slide rails from the drive Chapter 14 Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing OM07359 Figure 14 2 CD ROM Drive A moo D CD ROM Drive Plastic snap in slide rail Tab Power cable Signal cable 169 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM06742 Figure 14 3 Snap in Plastic Slide Rails A CD ROM drive B Tab C Screw D Slide rail Replacing the CD ROM Drive See Figures 14 2 and 14 3 170 1 2 3 Remove the CD ROM drive from the protective packaging and place it on an antistatic surface Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log Set any jumpers and switches on the drive according to the manufacturer s instructions Using two screws of the appropriate size and length not supplied attach each plastic slide rail to the drive Orient the drive so that the slide rails engage in the bay guide rails and push the drive into the bay until the slide rails lock in place Connect the power signal cables to the drive Reinstall the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling This step is optional Run the SSU or Setup to specify that the CD ROM drive is the boot device For information about running these utilities see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run and Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run 15 Mid
178. ity diskette gt NOTE If your diskette drive is disabled or improperly configured you must use BIOS Setup to enable it If necessary you can disable the drive after you are done with the FRUSDR utility 89 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility This utility is compatible with ROM DOS Ver 6 22 MS DOS Ver 6 22 and later versions The utility accepts CFG SDR and FRU load files The executable file for the utility is frusdr exe The utility requires the following supporting files e one or more fru files describing the system s field replaceable units e a cfg file describing the system configuration e a sdr file describing the sensors in the system Command Line Format The basic command line format is frusdr h d dmi fru sdr cfg filename cfg p v Command Description frusdr Is the name of the utility or h Displays usage information d dmi fru sdr Only displays requested area cfg filename cfg Uses custom CFG file p Pause between blocks of data V Verbose display any additional details Parsing the Command Line The FRUSDR Load Utility allows only one command line function at a time A command line function may consist of two parameters for example cfg filename cfg Any invalid parameters result in displaying an error message and exiting the program You can use either a slash or a minus sign to specify command line opti
179. le Connector 244 Signal GND GDCMPLT_L GND MD41_L GND MD45_L GND MD50_L GND VTT GND MUXCLK1 GND MD59 L GND MD63_L GND VTT GND MD71_L GND VTT GND SPAREKCLK1 GND WDEVT L GND DCMPLT_L GND DVALID_L GND DOFFO_L GND DOFF1_L GND DSEL_L GND RCGCLK Pin A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 Signal MD36_L VCC MD39_L VCC MD43_L VCC MD48_L VCC MD53_L VCC GND GND GND VCC MD61_L VCC MD65_L VCC MD69_L VCC NC VCC GND GND GND VCC CMNDO_L VCC BANK2_L VCC MAO_L GND MA4_L VCC MA8_L VCC GND GND Pin B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 Signal GND DSTBN2_L GND DSTBP2_L GND MD46_L GND MD51_L GND MD54_L VTT MD56_L VTT DSTBP3_L GND DSTBN3_L GND MD67_L GND VTT GND CARD_NUM VTT PHIT_L VTT RCMPLT_L GND BANKO_L GND ROW_L VTT MA2_L VTT MA6_L GND MA10_L GND MA13_L Pin C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 c9 C10 c11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 C37 C38 continued Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory Memory Module Connector A B amp C continued Signal Pin
180. lectriques e Dans les r gions sujettes aux orages magn tiques il est recomand de brancher votre syst me un supresseur de surtension et de d brancher toutes les lignes de t l communications de votre modem durant un orage e Muni d une prise murale correctement mise la terre e Suffisamment spacieux pour vous permettre d acc der aux c bles d alimentation ceux ci tant le seul moyen de mettre le syst me hors tension 293 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide WARNUNG Deutsch 294 Benutzer k nnen am Netzger t dieses Produkts keine Reparaturen vornehmen Das Produkt enth lt m glicherweise mehrere Netzger te Wartungsarbeiten m ssen von qualifizierten Technikern ausgef hrt werden Versuchen Sie nicht das mitgelieferte Netzkabel zu ndern oder zu verwenden wenn es sich nicht genau um den erforderlichen Typ handelt Der Wechselstrom des Systems wird durch den Ein Aus Schalter f r Gleichstrom nicht ausgeschaltet Ziehen Sie jedes Wechselstrom Netzkabel aus der Steckdose bzw dem Netzger t um den Stromanschlu des Systems zu unterbrechen SICHERHEISMASSNAHMEN Immer wenn Sie die Geh useabdeckung abnehmen um an das Systeminnere zu gelangen sollten Sie folgende Schritte beachten 1 Schalten Sie alle an Ihr System angeschlossenen Peripherieger te aus 2 Schalten Sie das System mit dem Hauptschalter aus 3 Ziehen Sie den Stromanschlu stecker Ihres Systems a
181. ltaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat the module into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard Insert the hook end of the holddown bar in the flange of the right slot guide Tighten the captive screw Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 135 ay m Li SY TP Ty Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Processor The CPU baseboard supports up to four processors packaged in S E C cartridges A CAUTION The processors can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling After removing a processor from a protective wrapper or from the CPU baseboard place 1t on a nonconductive static free surface Do not slide the processor over any surface Removing a Processor See Figures 13 5 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 3 Loosen the holddown bracket captive screw and remove the holddown bracket 4 Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers of the processor cartridge outward to eject the cartridge out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard 5 Slide the cartridge out of the slot guides and place it heat sink side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper A CAUTION If a slot 2 connector is depopulated a terminator module must b
182. ly Hot swappable Power Supply Hot swappable Power Supply Video Monitor Keyboard Mouse continued 287 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 288 Equipment Log continued Component Diskette Drive Tape Drive IDE CD ROM Drive SCSI CD ROM Drive SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 1 SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 2 VGA EGA Adapter Board SCSI Host Adapter Board PCI RAID Controller Board Hot swappable Fan 1 Manufacturer and Model Number Hot swappable Fan 2 Hot swappable Fan 3 Hot swappable Fan 4 Hot swappable Fan 5 Hot swappable Fan 6 Serial Number Date Installed C Warnings WARNING English US AVERTISSEMENT Francais WARNUNG Deutsch AVVERTENZA Italiano ADVERTENCIAS Espanol AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide WARNING English US The power supply in this product contains no user serviceable parts There may be more 290 than one supply in this product Refer servicing only to qualified personnel Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type required The DC push button on off switch on the system does not turn off system AC power To remove AC power from the system you must unplug each AC power cord from the wall outlet or power supply SAFETY STEPS Whenever you remove the chassis covers to access the inside of the system follow these steps 1 Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the system
183. m the Server Configuration Software CD Insert the CD into your CD ROM drive and press the reset switch on the front panel or lt Ctrl Alt Del gt to reboot the server When prompted press lt F2 gt to enter BIOS Setup From the Boot Menu select the Boot Device Priority option and then select the CD ROM drive as your primary boot device Press lt F10 gt to save the new settings Press lt Enter gt to exit BIOS Setup and boot from the CD From the CD menu select Run Utilities and press lt Enter gt Select Run System Setup Utility and press lt Enter gt Follow the screen prompts If you boot from the CD skip to step 4 3 The mouse driver loads if it is available press lt Enter gt to continue 4 When the main window of the SSU appears you can customize the user interface before continuing 59 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Customizing the SSU The SSU lets you customize the user interface according to your preferences The AF sets these preferences and saves them in the AF INI file so that they take effect the next time you start the SSU There are four user customizable settings NOTE If you run the SSU from nonwritable media like a CD these preferences will be lost when you exit the SSU e Color this button lets you change the default colors associated with different items on the screen with predefined color combinations The color changes are instantaneous e Mode this button lets you set th
184. me and press the lt spacebar gt or lt Enter gt a system Setup Utility DD File Preferences Help Topics Tasks Available Tasks Task Description The RCA provides support to configure system resources such as memory 1 0 ports and DMA channels It also allows the reservation Boot Devices PHA Security of resources for legacy SEL ISA adapters and SEL Manager interrupt configuration PCI adapters Preferences Color Language System Setup Utility Figure 5 1 System Setup Utility Main Window Resource Configuration Add in RCA Window The RCA provides three major functions e Creates representations of devices that cannot be discovered by the system ISA cards e Modifies the contents of the system by adding and removing devices e Modifies the resources used by devices You can use the RCA window to define an ISA card or add an ISA card by clicking on the appropriate button Removing an ISA card requires that the card be highlighted in the Devices section of the screen before clicking on the button gt NOTE You can only add as many ISA cards as you have available ISA slots in the server 61 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 1 From the SSU main window launch the RCA by selecting the Resources task under the RCA heading in the task box 2 When the RCA window appears it displays messages similar to the following Baseboard System Board PCI Card Bus 00 dev 00 Host Processor Brid
185. me seque 1 Togliere e mettere in un posto sicuro tutte le viti delle coperture 2 Togliere le coperture Per il giusto flusso dell aria e raffreddamento del sistema rimettere sempre le coperture del telaio prima di riaccendere il sistema Operare il sistema senza le coperture al loro proprio posto potrebbe danneggiare i componenti del sistema Per rimettere le coperture del telaio 1 Controllare prima che non si siano lasciati degli attrezzi o dei componenti dentro il sistema 2 Controllare che i cavi dei supporti aggiuntivi ed altri componenti siano stati installati appropriatamente 8 Attaccare le coperture al telaio con le viti tolte in precedenza e avvitarle strettamente 4 Ricollegare tutti i cavi esterni e le prolunghe AC del sistema continua Appendix C Warnings AVVERTENZA Italiano continua Se il sistema stato a lungo in funzione il microprocessore e il dissipatore di calore potrebbero essere surriscaldati Fare attenzione alla presenza di piedini appuntiti e parti taglienti sulle schede e sul telaio E consigliabile l uso di guanti di protezione Esiste il pericolo di un esplosione se la pila non viene sostituita in modo corretto Utilizzare solo pile uguali o di tipo equivalente a quelle consigliate dal produttore Per disfarsi delle pile usate seguire le istruzioni del produttore Il sistema amp progettato per funzionare in un ambiente di lavoro tipo Scegliere una postazione che sia e Pul
186. meter V in 115 V in 230 V in Frequency Minimum 90 180 47 AC Input Current at maximum load Nominal 100 120 200 240 50 60 13 A 115 VAC 7 A 220 VAC Table 20 2 Power Supply Output Ratings Maximum 132 264 63 Units V RMS V RMS Ampere Power Supply Outputs 3 3 V 5V 12V 12V 5 V Standby 15V Individual Supply at 100 120VAC 31A 31A 31A 1A 1A 200 mA Individual Supply at 220 240VAC 36 A 36 A 36 A 1A 1A 200 mA Two or Three Supplies at 100 120VAC 58 A 58 A 58 A 1A 1 75 A 200 mA Two or Three Supplies at 200 240VAC 68 A 64 A 68 A 1A 1 75 A 200 mA 1 Forced load sharing is for 5 3 3 and 12 V only Passive load sharing is used for 5V Standby 12 and 15V Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Server Current Usage Table 20 3 shows the current usage for both minimally and fully configured servers You can easily calculate power usage in the server from the numbers provided The table is for reference only It is not meant to provide the exact current usage in the server NOTE The current usage will vary depending on the number of processors the number of I O card the number of hard drives and the size and number of DIMMs on the memory modules installed in your server Table 20 3 Server Board Set Voltages and Currents 3 3 V 5 V 12 V 5 V Standby 12 V Min Max 2 Min Max Min Max Min M
187. n DIMM sockets Bank C J13 J16 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank D U6E2 DS1624 PC EEPROM and temperature sensor package J21 memory interface connector Eject insert levers onmnmoou 239 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Installing DIMMs CAUTION 240 DIMM devices with gold contacts should not be installed in DIMM sockets with tin lead contacts or vice versa Mixing dissimilar metal contacts types has been shown to result in unreliable memory operation To avoid potential memory problems use only DIMMs from JEDEC compatible manufacturers that have been tested for compatibility with the memory module Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved DIMMs See Figures 19 5 and 19 6 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module place the module DIMM side up on a nonconductive static free surface Hold the DIMM only by the edges as you remove the DIMM from the antistatic package Beginning with bank A Figure 19 5 socket J1 orient the DIMM so that the two notches in the bottom edge align with the keyed socket OM07320 Figure 19 5 DIMM Orientation Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory
188. n boards The SSU is PCI aware and it complies with the ISA Plug and Play specifications The SSU works with any compliant configuration CFG file supplied by the peripheral device manufacturer The I O baseboard comes with a CFG file The CFG file describes the characteristics of the board and the system resources that it requires The configuration registers on PCI and ISA Plug and Play add in boards contain the same type of information that is in a CFG file Some ISA boards also come with a CFG file 57 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide The SSU uses the information provided by CFG files configuration registers flash memory and the information that you enter to specify a system configuration The SSU writes the configuration information to flash memory The SSU stores configuration values in flash memory These values take effect when you boot the server POST checks the values against the actual hardware configuration if they do not agree POST generates an error message You must then run the SSU to specify the correct configuration before the server boots The SSU always includes a checksum with the configuration data so that the BIOS can detect any potential data corruption before the actual hardware configuration takes place What You Need to Do The SSU may be run directly from the Server Configuration Software CD or from a set of DOS diskettes If you choose to run the SSU from a set diskettes you must copy th
189. nction OS that supports networking or Windowst To run your server and applications you must buy the OS of your choice and install it on the server See Figure 2 3 Open the CD tray by pressing the open close button on the front panel of the CD ROM drive the tray will slide out of the drive 2 Open the CD case Press down on the center hub of the case with your finger to release the hub tension on the CD CAUTION 36 Handle the CD only by the inner and outer edges Do not touch the data side of the CD the side without the label Gently grasp the center hole and outer edge of the CD remove it from the case and place it label side up in the tray Press the open close button or gently push on the tray it will automatically slide into the drive OM06774 Figure 2 3 CD ROM Drive A Open close push button switch B CD tray Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server When POST completes the server beeps once boots from the CD installs a mouse driver and displays the CD ROM menu Use the arrow keys to scroll through the menu bar and to view the tasks in the pop up menus Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server gt NOTE If you do not see the CD ROM menu but see the following message instead Operating system not found you need to change the Boot Device Priority to the CD ROM See Server Won t Boot From the CD on page 38 for instructions Copying Conf
190. nectors J4H1B Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 12V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 12V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 12V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 12V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 12V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 12V P2E3 3 3V Connector J4H1C Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal P1A1 GND P1B1 GND P1C1 12V P1D1 5V P1E1 3 3V P1A2 GND P1B2 GND P1C2 12V P1D2 5V P1E2 3 3V P1A3 GND P1B3 GND P1C3 12V P1D3 5V P1E3 3 3V P2A1 GND P2B1 GND P2C1 12V P2D1 5V P2E1 3 3V P2A2 GND P2B2 GND P2C2 12V P2D2 5V P2E2 3 3V P2A3 GND P2B3 GND P2C3 12V P2D3 5V P2E3 3 3V 204 Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers 32 bit PCI Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Al TRST_L A32 AD16 B1 12V B32 AD17 A2 12 V A33 3 3V B2 TCK B33 C BE2_L A3 TMS A34 FRAME_L B3 GND Ground B34 GND A4 TDI A35 GND B4 TDO B35 IRDY_L A5 5 V A36 TRDY_L B5 5 V B36 3 3 V A6 INTA_L A37 GND B6 5 V B37 DEVSEL L A7 INTC_L A38 STOP_L B7 INTB_L B38 GND A8 5 V A39 3 3V B8 INTD_L B39 LOCK_L A9 RESERVED A40 SDONE B9 PRSNT1_L B40 PERR_L A10 5V A41 SBO_L B10 RESERVED B41 3 3 V A11 RESERVED A42 GND B11 PRSNT2_L B42 SERR
191. nent Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot PID Component Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot Expansion Slot 1 Install user supplied video adapters only in slots P1 or P2 199 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide PHP I O Baseboard Layout AB CD E F OM07313 Figure 17 3 PHP 1 0 Baseboard Layout J1G2 Primary IDE port J2G1 Primary SCSI port J1E2 Diskette drive port J2E2 Secondary SCSI port J1C1 12C feature connector J2C1 jumper block J1A1 USB connector J2A1 I O riser card connector J3B1 16 bit ISA expansion slot P1 P6 32 bit PCI expansion slots P7 P1064 bit PCI expansion slots Expander bus power connectors Expander bus signal connector B3G1 Battery zzra onmnmoon gt 200 PHP I O Baseboard Connectors Chapter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Expander Bus Connector Signal Section Signal COM2_TO_FP_EN IO_TCK IO_TDO BMC_SPI_BUS 1 BMC_SPI_BUS 6 BMC_SPI_BUS 0 12C_BMC_SCL 12C_BMC_SDA NMI_5V GND OD Li XOD_L 1 X0D_L 3 X0D_L 4 GND XOD_L 6 X0D_L 8 XOD_L 9 GND X0D_L 12 X0D_L 14 X0D
192. nfiguration Utility If you have installed SCSI devices in the server press lt Ctrl C gt When the utility appears follow the instructions on the monitor to configure the host adapter See Chapter 6 SCSI Configuration Utility for instructions 41 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 42 If POST detects an error it displays the error code the server beeps once and this message appears Press lt F1 gt to Resume lt F2 gt for Setup To resume press lt F1 gt However if a drive with bootable media is not detected the server beeps once and this message appears Operating System not found To enter Setup Press lt F2 gt When the Setup utility appears follow the instructions on the monitor If POST did not detect an error and you choose not to run the SCSI Configuration Utility POST continues the server beeps once and this message appears Operating System not found See Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server for instructions on creating software installation diskettes If the server halts before POST completes running it emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error that requires immediate attention If POST can display a message on the video monitor it causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears Note the screen display and write down the beep code you hear this information is useful for your service representative For a listing of beep codes and error mes
193. ng system such as Windows Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run e Running the SSU Remotely To run the SSU remotely you must invoke the SSU BAT file with the t switch and redirect the text mode output via BIOS console redirection The t switch puts the display in text mode and allows the console to be viewed and controlled via BIOS console redirection First configure the server for BIOS console redirection Then configure the modem to auto answer and to modem reaction to DTR set to return to command state After configuring the server it should be booted to a DOS prompt either locally or remotely through the EMP Once the server boots the remote user can use any ANSI terminal emulation program to connect to the configured COM port and invoke SSU t This process requires a bootable DOS partition and all files required for the SSU to run must be on the server Starting the SSU The SSU consists of a collection of task oriented modules plugged into a common framework called the Application Framework AF The AF provides a launching point for individual tasks and a location for setting customization information 1 Turn on your video monitor and your system 2 There are two ways to start the SSU a Froma set of SSU diskettes created from the CD Insert SSU diskette 1 in drive A and press the push button reset switch or lt Ctrl Alt Del gt to reboot your server from the diskette Follow the screen prompts b Fro
194. ng systems 17 OVL files 57 P Password administrative 26 protection 26 user 26 PCI 17 bus master slots 146 video controller 187 PCI bus hot plug covers reinstalling 124 peripheral bay backplane 183 peripheral bay blindmate board connectors blind mate 280 diskette drive 281 IDE 282 power 281 Wide SCSI 283 Peripheral Bay Cover reinstalling 120 Peripheral devices connecting 31 floppy disk drive 43 keyboard connecting 31 monitor connecting 31 peripherial bay removing 159 peripherial bay backplane reinstalling 161 removing 159 160 peripherial bay blind mate board reinstalling 162 removing 162 PHP I O baseboard component layout 200 connectors 32 bit PCI 205 64 bit PCI 206 diskette drive port 208 F16 bus 201 front panel 211 C 211 IDE port 210 ISA 207 legacy 212 USB port 212 wide fast 16 bit SCSI port 209 expansion slots 185 I O riser card 192 IDE controller 190 ISA expansion slot 186 jumpers 193 PHP I O baseboard continued boot option 197 flash memory 195 PCI expansion slots 186 PCI video controller 187 server management 190 Physical specifications 30 POST description 35 41 running 35 41 Power cord obtaining 33 Power requirements 30 Power supply 18 configuration constraints 110 failure LED 110 fan 18 handles 29 hot swapping 110 input voltages 252 output voltage 252 redundant 110 removing 109 replacing 112 safety interlock mechan
195. nt of it on slide assemblies The anchors must be able to withstand a force of up to 113 kg 250 Ibs You must also consider the weight of any other device installed in the rack Main AC power disconnect You are responsible for installing an AC power disconnect for the entire rack unit This main disconnect must be readily accessible and it must be labeled as controlling power to the entire unit not just to the server s Safety Guidelines Grounding the rack installation To avoid the potential for an electrical shock hazard you must include a third wire safety grounding conductor with the rack installation If the server power cord is plugged into an AC outlet that is part of the rack then you must provide proper grounding for the rack itself If the server power cord is plugged into a wall AC outlet the safety grounding conductor in the power cord provides proper grounding only for the server You must provide additional proper grounding for the rack and other devices installed in it Overcurrent protection The server is designed for an AC line voltage source with up to 20 amperes of overcurrent protection If the power system for the equipment rack is installed on a branch circuit with more than 20 amperes of protection you must provide supplemental protection for the server If more than one server is installed in the rack the power source for each server must be from a separate branch circuit The overall current rating of a serv
196. ntes se hayan instalado correctamente 3 Incorpore las tapas al chasis mediante los tornillos extra dos anteriormente tens ndolos firmemente 4 Conecte todos los cables externos y los cables de alimentaci n CA al sistema contin a Appendix C Warnings ADVERTENCIAS Espa ol contin a Si el sistema ha estado en funcionamiento el microprocesador y el disipador de calor pueden estar a n calientes Tambi n conviene tener en cuenta que en el chasis o en el tablero puede haber piezas cortantes o punzantes Por ello se recomienda precauci n y el uso de guantes protectores Existe peligro de explosi n si la pila no se cambia de forma adecuada Utilice solamente pilas iguales o del mismo tipo que las recomendadas por el fabricante del equipo Para deshacerse de las pilas usadas siga igualmente las instrucciones del fabricante El sistema est dise ado para funcionar en un entorno de trabajo normal Escoja un lugar e Limpio y libre de part culas en suspensi n salvo el polvo normal e Bien ventilado y alejado de fuentes de calor incluida la luz solar directa e Alejado de fuentes de vibraci n e Aislado de campos electromagn ticos fuertes producidos por dispositivos el ctricos e En regiones con frecuentes tormentas el ctricas se recomienda conectar su sistema a un eliminador de sobrevoltage y desconectar el m dem de las l neas de telecomunicaci n durante las tormentas e Provisto
197. o determine the mode of the COM 2 port The following discussion covers how EMP Console functions in each mode e Command mode is the default COM 2 state In this state EMP Console communicates with the server s firmware allowing the client to remotely reset or power the server up or down The client can also view the server s System Event Log SEL Field Replaceable Unit FRU information or Sensor Data Record SDR table e In console redirect mode EMP Console serves as a PC ANSI terminal window for BIOS console redirection Commands typed in this terminal window are transmitted through BIOS to the server s console and text displayed on the server console is displayed on the EMP Console s terminal window In this mode you can remotely view boot messages access BIOS setup and run DOS text mode applications through the EMP Console s terminal window En lolx File Connect Action Help s al On SERVER NAME LINE Direct MODE EMP LINE STATUS Connected Figure 7 1 EMP Console in Command State Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use PhoenixBIOS 4 8 Release 6 8 Copyright 1985 1998 Phoenix Technologies Ltd All Rights Reserved ASPN 86B 6616 B 9865641525 A45 NX BIOS VERSION BETA 18 FOR EVALUATION ONLY NOT FOR RESALE Build Time 85 84 98 15 19 44 1 Pentium lt R gt II Xeon lt TM gt Processor 466 MHz 66666646K System RAM Passed 6136648K Extended Memory ECC Initialized
198. o remove the PCI bus hot plug cover 7 While facing the back of the server pull hard on the front edge of the cover to disengage the tabs along the sides of the cover from the slots in the chassis slide 8 Slide the cover backward about an inch and lift it straight up Set the cover aside 9 Lift PCI bus regular expansion slot cover from chassis OM07303 Figure 12 3 Top Cover C Two screws 122 Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling OM07305 Figure 12 4 PCI Regular Slot Cover A Two screws Reinstalling the Top Cover See Figures 12 3 and 12 4 1 2 Reinstall the PCI bus regular expansion slot cover While facing the back of the server position the top cover over the chassis so that the tabs along the edges of the cover align with the slots in the top edge of the chassis Gently lower the cover straight down on top of the server Then place your hands on the outer surface of the cover opposite each other and push the cover forward to seat it Attach the cover to the chassis with the two screws and tighten them firmly 6 0 inch pounds Connect all external cables and power cords to the server Removing the PCI Bus Hot Plug Cover See Figure 12 5 1 2 3 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove and save the screws that attach the PCI bus hot plug cover to the chassis While facing the back of the server pull on the front edge of the cover to
199. oduct Guide Figure 13 2 Fan Array Housing 130 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling LCD Module The LCD module displays server information Removing the LCD Module See Figure 13 3 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove the two screws that secure the LCD module to the chassis Disconnect the LCD module data and power cables from the front panel board and set the LCD module aside Reinstalling the LCD Module See Figure 13 3 1 Connect the LCD module data and power cables to the front panel board gt NOTE Verify that both cables are below the sheet of insulating material above the front panel board 2 Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws 3 Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 131 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07358 Figure 13 3 LCD Module Memory Modules CAUTION To avoid damaging the memory module DIMM sockets do not attempt to use the metal stiffener on the memory module as a handle Removing a Memory Module See Figure 13 4 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 3 Simultane
200. olled displayed when controlled by the OS Set the base I O address for the diskette controller Enabled automatically sets two way or four way permuting based on the memory configuration Enabled requires e number of rows to be a power of two e all rows to be the same size e all populated rows to be adjacent and start at row 0 Enabled requires a symmetric RAM configuration between two memory modules continued 49 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 50 Advanced Menu continued Feature Base RAM Step Extended RAM Step L2 Cache ISA Expansion Aliasing Memory Scrubbing Restreaming Buffer Read Prefetch for PXBOA Read Prefetch for PXBOB Read Prefetch for PXB1A Multiboot Support Special VGA Devnode Option 1 MB 1 KB Every location 1 MB 1 KB Every location Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled 16 32 64 16 32 64 16 32 64 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Description Tests base memory once per MB or once per KB or every location Tests extended memory once per MB or once per KB or every location Enabled causes the secondary cache to be sized and enabled Disabled causes the L2 cache to be disabled for core clock frequency bus ratios equal to 2 Enabled causes every UO access with an address in the range of x100h x3FFh x500h x7FFh x900h xBFFh and xDO0h xFFFh to be internally aliased to the range
201. om the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one Lay the cable in position inside the chassis Reinstall the three plug retaining brackets and secure with screws Reinstall the AC filter tray Reinstall the I O Tray as described earlier Reinstall the CPU baseboard tray as described earlier Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Peripheral Bay Removing the Peripheral Bay See Figure 13 18 1 2 3 4 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and memory module covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove and save the four screws that secure the peripheral bay to the chassis Grab the CPU baseboard tray support and pull the peripheral bay from the chassis Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay See Figure 13 18 1 2 eg Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Place the peripheral bay into position and push into place using the CPU baseboard tray support Ensure that the CPU baseboard tray support engages with the CPU baseboard tray Install the four securing screws removed earlier Reinstall the top and memory module covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling 159 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07350 Figure 13 18 Peripheral Bay Peripheral Bay Backplane Removing the Peripheral Bay
202. ombined Wattage W 255 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing This chapter tells how to replace the lithium back up battery on the PHP I O baseboard Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Tools and Supplies You Need e Flat head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Pen or pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 257 AC450NX Server System Product Guide Back up Battery The lithium battery on the PHP I O baseboard powers the real time clock RTC for up to ten years in the absence of power The RTC contains 256 bytes of general purpose RAM that stores the system BIOS configuration information clock registers and general purpose control registers Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved replacement devices and available service A CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer Discard used battery according to manufacturer s instruc
203. ompatible keyboard mouse controller Two universal serial bus USB ports This card contains all legacy I O connections it plugs into a card edge connector on the PHP I O baseboard PS 2 compatible keyboard and mouse ports these are interchangeable PS 2 compatible parallel port Analog VGA 15 pin video port Two PS 2 compatible 9 pin serial ports The midplane e electrically connects the PHP I O memory power supplies and CPU baseboard e distributes DC power to the PHP I O and CPU baseboards peripheral bay backplane cooling fans and the front panel board e distributes the power load of the server among two or three 750 watt autoranging power supplies This module plugs into any unpopulated slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard This module terminates the FSB GTL signals of the slot 2 connector when a processor S E C cartridge is not installed in it This backplane supports hot swapping of SCA type SCSI drives mounted in carriers in and out of the hot docking bays Chassis Chapter 1 Introduction to the High performance Server Figures 1 2 and 1 3 show the major components of the server mo OO OM07330 Figure 1 2 Chassis Board Set Front panel board CPU baseboard and processors PHP I O baseboard Midplane Memory modules 21 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide
204. onfiguration file e displays the FRU information it may have values the user can change e updates the nonvolatile storage device EEPROM associated with the Baseboard Management Controller BMC that holds the SDR and FRU area e updates the DMI area located in the BIOS nonvolatile storage device e generically handles FRU devices that may not be associated with the BMC When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility The FRUSDR Load Utility can be used to e Read the system FRU and SDR information e Load the FRU information using the configuration file e Update the sensor data records after adding or removing processors in your server It programs the sensors that need to be monitored for server management e Enter the Asset Tag after upgrade replacement of the PHP I O baseboard The server must be rebooted to properly initialize the sensors after programming the Sensor Data Records To do this turn the server off and disconnect the AC power cords from the server power supplies Wait approximately 30 seconds reconnect the power cords and turn the server on What You Need to Do The FRUSDR Load Utility may be run directly from the Configuration Software CD or from diskettes you create from the CD Before you can run the FRUSDR Load Utility from a diskette you must copy the utility from the Server Configuration Software CD to a DOS bootable diskette See Chapter 2 On site Installation Installing the Server to create an FRUSDR Load Util
205. ons The p and v options may be used in conjunction with any of the other options Displaying Usage Information 90 When the utility is run with the or h command line flags the following message is displayed when the verbose flag v is added to the help command FRU amp SDR Load Utility Version 2 0 Usage frusdr Is the name of the utility z7 Ox sh Displays usage information d dmi fru sdr Only displays requested area cfg filename cfg Uses custom CFG file p Pause between blocks of data v Verbose display any additional details Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run Copyright c 1998 Intel Corporation All Rights Reserved This utility must be run from a system executing DOS Running in a Window s DOS box is insufficient and will provide incorrect results Programming the BMC FRU area clears the SDR table therefore the SDR table must be reprogrammed Upon completing the programming of the FRU and SDR areas the server should be rebooted Note DOS users may alternatively use a instead of the The following information is display if v option is included in the command line The D FRU command may be followed with up to 16 device addresses Thes device addresses are used to view up to 16 different FRU areas instead of the default of displaying the BMC FRU The arguments following the d FRU are in the same order and value as the NVS_TYPE NVS_LUN DEV_BUS and
206. onsole How to Use Setting Up the Server for the EMP To use the EMP you must configure the server s BIOS with specific settings These settings are found in the BIOS Server menu and the Console Redirection submenu The BIOS settings section found earlier in this document shows all the available options This section focuses on the settings that must be configured in order to use the EMP Server Menu All EMP related settings occur in the Server main menu Change only the items below all other default settings should remain the same EMP Password Switch amp EMP Password Anytime an attempt to initiate a connection is made a prompt for the user password appears If no EMP password is setup then anyone can access the EMP by clicking OK In the EMP Password area of the Server menu the EMP Password Switch option must be set to enable Then type in a password of up to eight alphanumeric characters If a beep is heard the password was accepted EMP Access Modes Choose either Disabled Pre boot or Always Active depending on the type of EMP access needed The tables above show what is available with a given setting EMP Restricted Mode Access Set Restricted Mode to either enabled or disabled as needed If in enabled mode this means that EMP Console s server control options Power off and Reset are unavailable except power on In disabled mode these same server control options are available EMP Direct Connect Modem Mode Selec
207. ontact the software vendor s customer service representative After the Server Has Been Running Correctly Problems that occur after the server hardware and software have been running correctly often indicate equipment failure Many situations that are easy to correct however can also cause such problems Checklist LI a a If you are running the software from a diskette try a new copy of the software If you are running the software from a CD try a different CD to see 1f the problem occurs on all CDs If you are running the software from a hard disk drive try running it from a diskette If the software runs correctly there may be a problem with the copy on the hard disk drive Reinstall the software on the hard disk drive and try running it again Make sure all the necessary files are installed If the problems are intermittent there may be a loose cable dirt in the keyboard if keyboard input is incorrect a marginal power supply or other random component failures If you suspect that a transient voltage spike power outage or brownout might have occurred reload the software and try running it again For example symptoms of voltage spikes include a flickering video monitor unexpected server reboots and the server does not respond to user commands 263 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide gt NOTE If you are getting random errors in your data files they may be getting corrupted by voltage spikes on
208. ooling for the hot swap drives A system with two power supplies is capable of cooling most drives that would be installed into the system however drives which dissipate a large amount of power may require three power supplies to be installed into the system to insure proper cooling Refer to the product specifications to determine if the particular drive to be installed needs the additional cooling provided by a third power supply Carriers for 3 5 inch wide 1 inch or 1 6 inch height drives allow easy hot swapping of drives in and out of these bays without shutting down the server By installing a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks RAID controller board on the PHP I O baseboard RAID software and SCSI hard disk drives in the hot docking bays you can easily set up RAID applications Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 2 bit e Antistatic wrist strap recommended e Penor pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU 101 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives The server supports a variety of single ended and differential SCSI SCA type hard disk drives As shipped from the supplier the server may not contain any drives Contact your sales rep
209. ormation only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Information only Additional setup menus to configure the console Select the port address Make sure these values are identical to those of serial ports A and B in the peripheral configuration setup menu continued Server Menu continued Chapter 4 Setup Utility When to Run Feature Baud Rate Flow Control Processor Retest EMP Password Switch EMP ESC Sequence EMP Hangup Line String Modem Init String EMP Access Mode EMP Restricted Mode Access EMP Direct Connect Modem Mode Option 9600 19 2K 38 4 K 115 2 K No Flow Control CTS RTS XON XOFF CTS RTS CD No Yes Disabled Enabled Preboot Only Always Active Disabled Disabled Enabled Direct Connect Modem Mode Description Select the baud rate Select the flow control e CTS RTS Hardware e XON XOFF Software e CTS RTS CD Hardware carrier detect for modem use Yes causes the BIOS to clear historical processor status and retest all processors on the next boot Enable or disable the EMP password The front panel controller firmware updates this field The front panel controller firmware updates this field This string accepts up to 16 characters The upper four characters will go to the next field which will pop up as soon as the 16th character is filled Trying to fill the 17th
210. ously rotate the eject insert levers of the memory module outward about 90 to disengage the pin and socket connector of the module from the pin and socket connector of the midplane 4 Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module slide it out of the slot guides Place the module DIMM side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper 132 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Reinstalling a Memory Module See Figure 13 4 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module remove it from its protective wrapper Place the module DIMM side up on a nonconductive static free surface 3 Record the serial number of the memory module in your equipment log 4 Remove any installed DIMM from the removed memory module and reinstall them in the replacement memory module gt NOTE The memory module installs DIMM side down 5 Grasp the memory module by the eject insert levers and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the levers engage with the flanges in front of the guides 6 Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat the pin and socket connector of the module into the pin and socket connector of the midplane 7 Ifyou removed the LCD module reinstall it as described earlier 8 Reinstall the memory module cover as
211. page 115 PHP Input Output 1 0 Baseboard Features The PHP I O baseboard provides the primary I O interface of the server The baseboard also interfaces with the CPU baseboard through the Midplane The PHP I O baseboard provides e three functionally independent PCI buses 32 bit primary PCI bus 32 bit secondary PCI bus 64 bit PCI bus e integrated Symbios 53C896 Dual Channel LVDS controller e integrated IDE controller that supports one IDE bus e onboard video serial parallel and universal serial bus USB ports e user accessible expansion slots five 32 bit regular PCI bus slots four 64 bit hot plug PCI bus slots one shared 16 bit ISA 32 bit PCI bus slot e PC server management interface AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 32 bit PCI Expansion Slots Six 32 bit PCI bus master slots two primary and four secondary on the PHP I O baseboard provide expansion enhancement One 32 bit primary slot shares a common chassis expansion slot with the ISA slot you can use the shared slot for either PCI or ISA but not both The PCI bus operates at 33 MHz and provides e 32 bit memory addressing e 43 3 V and 5 V environments e burst transfers of up to 133 MB sec e H 16 or 32 bit data transfers e plug and play configuration e hierarchical bus to maximize connectivity amp NOTE Add in video boards must be installed in the 32 bit primary PCI slots 64 bit PCI Hot plug Expansion Slots Four 64 bit PC
212. plane Description Voltages This chapter describes the midplane Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Midplane Features The midplane distributes the power load CPU and PHP I O baseboards memory modules peripheral bays and hot swap hard disk backplane among two or three 750 watt autoranging power supplies It also provides a bus interface for the CPU and PHP I O baseboards memory modules and the hot swap hard disk backplane The midplane provides the following voltages and maximum currents Voltage Maximum Current 12V 56A 5 V 68 A 3 3 V 61 A 5 V standby 1A 12V 1A 24 V Bias 100 mA 12C Bus The private DC bus monitors failures and voltage margining in the server The 5 V standby voltage provides power for the bus and it is available even when the server power is off 171 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Detection Signals Signal Name Present AC OK Predictive Failure Fault Power On Description When the presence detect line is low the power supply is present When the power good signal on the midplane goes high it signifies that all power supply voltages are available and stable The predictive failure signal from the power supply alerts the front panel controller FPC in case the supply is lik
213. plicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques NMB 003 dict e par le Ministre Canadian des Communications English translation of the notice above This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Canadian Department of Communications B Equipment Log Use this equipment log to record pertinent information about your server You will need some of this information when you run the System Setup Utility SSU Record the model and serial numbers of the server components dates of component removal or replacement and the vendor s name Be sure to record the same information for any components added to the server such as hard disk drives add in boards or printers The location of serial numbers on add in boards hard disk drives and external equipment such as video monitors or printers varies from one manufacturer to another Equipment Log Component Manufacturer and Model Number Serial Number Date Installed Server PHP I O Baseboard I O Riser Card CPU Baseboard Front Panel Board Processor 1 Processor 2 Processor 3 Processor 4 VRM 1 VRM 2 VRM 3 VRM 4 VRM 5 VRM 6 Memory Module 1 Memory Module 2 Midplane Peripheral Bay Backplane Hot swappable Power Supp
214. ponding banks must be identically populated with DIMMs of the same size and type Before allowing the processors to come out of reset server management firmware scans the presence detect bits of all DIMMs installed on the memory modules If they are 50 ns DIMMs then server management changes the value of the chipset s DRAM speed mode bit The default value on this bit is a high voltage level which corresponds to 60 ns timings changing the value to a low voltage level places this bit in the 50 ns mode Changing the value of the bit can only be effected by software and it must be before the processors come out of reset If the bit changes while a memory access is in process the results are unpredictable After deciding the value of the bit and making any necessary changes server management may proceed with processor reset While changing this bit will not increase the theoretical maximum bandwidth it will decrease initial latency of DRAM reads by one clock and increase bandwidth of consecutive page misses When installing less than 16 DIMMs on a memory module there is a preferred order for populating the DIMM sockets to maintain optimal signal integrity When installing two memory modules on the CPU baseboard you should always alternate DIMM installation between memory modules For instance when installing 16 DIMMs in the system the quantities should be divided such that eight fill the first two banks of one module and eight more fill the same
215. pplies However we recommend doing all procedures in this manual only at an ESD workstation If one is not available you can provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to chassis ground of the server any unpainted metal surface when handling components Handling boards and modules Boards and modules can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling After removing a board or module from a protective wrapper or from the server place the board or module component side up on a nonconductive static free surface If you place the I O baseboard on a conductive surface the back up battery leads may short out If they do this will result in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery Do not slide a board or module over any surface Cooling and airflow Operating the server with the top and side covers removed can damage the components inside it For proper cooling and airflow always replace the covers and air baffles before turning on the server Back up battery Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer Discard the used battery according to the manufacturer s instructions Equipment Rack Precautions A WARNING 116 Anchor the equipment rack The equipment rack must be anchored to an unmovable support to prevent it from falling over when one or more servers are extended in fro
216. r CPU Baseboard 139 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide CPU Tray The CPU tray provides rigid mounting for the front panel board the CPU baseboard and the memory modules It also facilitates mating with the midplane Removing the CPU Tray See Figure 13 7 1 2 REN N e ES Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top cover and memory module cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Remove all terminator and processor modules as described earlier Remove the LCD module as described earlier Remove the memory modules as described earlier Remove the fan array housing as described earlier Remove six screws that secure the tray to the chassis Simultaneously pull the eject insert levers down to eject the tray out of the midplane Slide the tray from the chassis Reinstalling the CPU Tray See Figure 13 7 and 13 8 1 Carefully position the tray on the guide rails and slide the tray into the chassis A CAUTION ie Se MES 140 Be careful not to pinch the cables coming from the peripheral bay when reinstalling the tray Simultaneously lift the eject insert levers to mate the tray grand connector with the midplane grand connector Ensure that the lower tray guide engages with the tray support attached to the peripheral bay Be sure CPU support rail engages rear support Reinstall the six screws that secure the tray to the chassis Re
217. r and wait for POST to complete This automatically clears the password See Chapter 3 Power on Self Test Description Running 7 Turn off the server unplug the power cords and remove the top and right side covers 8 Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 6 A B to pins 6 B C 9 Reinstall the covers and plug in the power cords 10 Run the SSU to configure your server See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Ji Updating the BIOS The jumper on J2C1 pins 4 B C applies 12 V power to the VPP pin on the flash memory device This allows you to update the BIOS in flash memory with the Flash Update Utility Moving the jumper to pins 4 A B protects the contents of flash memory gt NOTE For a copy of the latest system BIOS release to create a Flash update utility diskette contact your dealer or sales representative Before you can update the system BIOS from the Flash Update Utility diskette you must make the diskette MS DOS bootable You must have either MS DOS version 5 00 or 6 00 or greater installed on C DOS To prevent accidentally installing a BIOS for a different type of system the update utility insures that the BIOS matches the target system gt NOTE Please review the update utility instructions and the release notes distributed with the update utility and BIOS code before attempting to update the BIOS The BIOS update utility allows you to update the e BIOS in flash memory e user and logo area of
218. r Codes and Messages The server BIOS displays POST error codes and messages on the video monitor When you turn on the server POST displays messages that provide information about the server If a failure occurs POST emits beep codes that indicate errors in hardware software or firmware Before the video adapter is initialized audible beep codes inform you of errors The errors are logged in the event log and the Extended BIOS Data Area EBDA If POST can display a message on the monitor it causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears 269 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Port 80h Codes After the video adapter has been successfully initialized after the server is turned on the BIOS indicates the current testing phase during POST by writing a 2 digit hex code to I O location 80h If a port 80h card is installed it displays this 2 digit code on a pair of hex display LEDs 270 The following table contains the port 80h codes displayed during the boot process The table also describes the error conditions associated with each beep code and the corresponding POST checkpoint CP code as seen by a port 80h card A beep code is a series of individual beeps emitted by the server speaker each equal in length For example if an error occurs at checkpoint 20h a beep code of 1 3 1 1 is generated 1 a single beep 3 burst of three beeps CP 02 04 06 08 09 0A 0B OC OE OF 10 11 12 14 16 18 1A 1C 20 22
219. r is responsible for turning the yellow drive fault LED on or off according to the states specified by commands received via SAF TE and IMB Figures 10 3 and 10 4 Look at the yellow LEDs below the hot docking bays to determine which drive is bad Push on the drive carrier latch of the bad drive and while grasping the handle pull the assembly toward you to disengage the drive from the backplane connector Carefully slide the assembly out of the bay and place it on an antistatic surface Orient the new carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot docking bay guide rails so that metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up Make sure you correctly place the carrier into the guide rails to avoid damage While grasping only the drive carrier handle firmly push the assembly into the bay until the driver carrier latches CAUTION Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push the assembly into the bay Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of 106 the bracket Chapter 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hotswapping ABC OM07345 Figure 10 4 Hot swap SCSI Drive Indicators A Green LED drive power B Green LED drive activity C Yellow LED drive fault 107 11 Hot swappable Power Supplies Hot Swapping This chapter tells
220. rates without a video monitor and keyboard for example as a network server you must install them to configure it You may remove them after running the SSU See Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run for information about running this utility Connect your keyboard mouse monitor and other peripheral devices after a qualified service technician installs internal options See Figure 2 1 Keyboard and Mouse Connect the signal cable of a PS 2 compatible keyboard or mouse to either one of the 6 pin miniature Deutsche Industrie Norm DIN connectors on the server back panel The BIOS detects and initializes the keyboard and mouse ports accordingly Each port is overcurrent protected by a 1 ampere positive temperature coefficient PTC resistor Monitor Connect the signal cable of the video monitor to the 15 pin connector of the Super VGA port on the back panel Other Devices Connect other external peripheral devices by following the manufacturer s documentation The back panel also provides two serial ports a parallel port and two USB ports The back of the chassis provides two Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB ports 31 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 32 Zrommoomp
221. rator password this field automatically changes to set The user password controls access to the system at boot To enter a password press lt Enter gt and follow the screen prompts The administrator password controls access to the setup utility To enter a password press lt Enter gt and follow the screen prompts Requires password entry before boot The system remains in the secure mode until you enter the password Password on Boot takes precedence over Secure Mode Boot Controls access to diskette drives Select the time out period of keyboard or mouse inactivity required before the secure mode activates A password must be entered for the secure mode to work Select a hot key and then press lt Ctrl Alt your hot key gt to place the system in the secure mode The key should not conflict with any application Available choices are A Z and 0 9 Press lt Del gt to remove the hot key Enabled lets the system boots in the secure mode Requires a password to unlock the system Enabled blanks video when the secure mode activates Requires a password to unlock the system Enabled write protects the diskette drive when the Secure Mode activates Requires a password to restore the diskette writes Enabled disables the front panel controls when the Secure Mode activates Requires a password to unlock the system 51 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Server Menu Feature System Management Firmware
222. rd the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log Set any jumpers or switches according to the drive manufacturer s instructions Install diskette drive in its support tray using the screws removed earlier Slide the drive into the 3 5 inch diskette drive bay until it stops Connect the power and signal cables Secure the drive to the bay with the screw you removed earlier Reinstall the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Run the SSU to specify that the diskette drive is installed in the server For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Chapter 14 Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing OM07360 Figure 14 1 Diskette Drive A Screw one 167 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide CD ROM Drive The server comes with an CD ROM drive installed in the peripheral bay Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved add in devices Removing the CD ROM Drive See Figures 14 2 and 14 3 168 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the power and the signal cables from the CD ROM drive Squeeze the tabs on the plastic snap in slide rails toward the drive to release it Pull the drive out of the bay until you can access
223. resentative or dealer for a list of approved drives that can be installed in the server Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier See Figures 10 1 and 10 2 1 Remove the 3 5 inch hard disk drive from the protective wrapper and place it on an antistatic surface 2 Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log 3 Orient the drive carrier so that the handle is toward your left and the metal EMI ESD fingers are toward your right 4 Orient the drive so that the board side faces toward the finger side of the carrier and the SCA connector faces away from you 5 Being careful not to damage the metal fingers of the carrier place it on the drive 6 Place the drive and carrier assembly on an antistatic surface of a table or a workbench so that the drive handle and fingers overlap the edge of the table or the workbench 7 Using four screws of the appropriate size and length not supplied attach the carrier to the drive CAUTION 102 Some specific hard disk drive designs require electrical isolation of the drive from the chassis or other ground paths These drives are usually clearly labeled with this requirement on the drive Full height 1 6 inch drives with this requirement must have an electrical isolator such as durable mylar tape placed between the EMI ESD grounding fingers and the top cover of the drive Failure to isolate this type of drive from the ground path will result in unpredictable opera
224. rly configured use Setup to configure the server into a bootable state and then use the SSU and other utilities to further configure the server In Setup you can enable the drive so you can use the SSU If necessary you can disable the diskette drive again after exiting the SSU e If the server does not have a diskette drive or it is disabled use Setup to configure the server e Ifyou have installed only an ISA add in board in your server If the server has a properly configured enabled diskette drive use the SSU to configure the server Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup Running the Setup Utility You can enter Setup under several conditions e when you turn on the server e when you reboot the server by pressing the push button reset switch on the front panel e when you reboot the server by pressing lt Ctrl Alt Del gt while at the DOS operating system prompt e when you turn on or reset your server after an orderly shutdown of an operating system other than DOS 43 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 44 Each time you turn on or reboot your server POST begins and after a few seconds displays this message Press lt F2 gt to enter Setup After pressing F2 a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests and initialization functions When the F2 prompt disappears pressing F2 will have no effect When Setup is entered the Main Menu options page is displayed
225. rmat Help About Displays SDR Manager version information SDR Manager File View Settings Help Record ID 0020h SDR Version 10h Record Type 01h Record Length 2Fh Sensor Owner ID 20h Sensor Owner LUN 00h Sensor Number 04h Sensor Owner Confirmation 0002h Sensor Module FRU Inv Device Owner ID 10h Sensor Initialization Fih Sensor Capabilities F h Sensor Type 02h Event Reading Base Type 01h Event Trigger Mask 6A69h Event Reading Mask 1200h Sensor Units 1 00h Sensor Units 2 Base Unit 04h Sensor Units 3 Modifier Unit 00h System Setup Utility Figure 5 9 SDR Manager Main Window 72 Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run Field Replaceable Unit FRU Manager In this window you can e Examine all FRU Inventory areas on the server in either Hex or Verbose mode e Examine individual FRU Inventory areas in either Hex or Verbose mode e Examine FRU Inventory areas from a previously stored binary file in either Hex or Verbose mode e Save the FRU Inventory areas to a file in either text or binary form The FRU Manager can display the FRU Inventory areas in either raw form hexadecimal or in an interpreted easy to understand textual form verbose The FRU manager s main window provides access to features of the add in through menus Each option included on the main menu supports an accelerator key Accelerator keys are indicated by an underlined letter
226. rols and Indicators leia acia 25 2 1 Server e CONMBCHONS yt ita 32 2 2 Server Power and Reset Switches 34 2 3 GD ROM DIN are ei EE Ee 36 2 4 BOO Ee EEN 38 2 5 GD ROM Boot Men iaa ee 38 5 1 System Setup Utility Main Window ae ek 61 5 2 CAMINO OW EE 62 5 8 Define ISA WV ING OW EA ES RR 63 5 4 Configuration WIRD OW E 65 5 5 System Resource Usage Window 66 5 6 Multiboot Eet EE 67 5 7 Password Main WINK OW EE 69 5 8 System Event Log Main Window 71 5 9 SDA Manager Main WINdOW eeneg eine 72 5 10 FRU Manager Main Window 74 7 1 EMP Console in Command State ee ee ee 78 7 2 EMP Console in Redirect EE 79 7 3 Connect RTE e WEE 84 7 44 BOWErON OI DIO E 85 7 EI Le WEE 86 7 6 Phonebook DIAS DEE 87 9 1 Removing Hot swapping a Fan EE 99 xiii AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide xiv Hard Disk Drive and Carrier asii 103 Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assemblv nenn 103 Installing a Hard Disk RTE 105 Hot swap SCSI Drive e e TEE 107 Removing a Power Supply es mussen 111 EE 120 Peripheral Bay Cover and Front Bezel nn 121 MOS 017A teks A AE E AE DT ea eae ods ace ace nk E 122 PC Regular Slot EE 123 PCI Bus Hot Plug COVER ec ee 124 Memory Module Cover unse ee de aurea ed 126 FAT RemoValss Scie Soe erty RSR ER ee 129 Fan Array ele ee KEE 130 LG DMA EE 132 Memo
227. rrent maximum at voltage levels Device 3 3 V 5Vstby 5V 12 V 12V PHP I O baseboard 5A 0 65A 4 32A 0 05A OA 16 bit ISA slot J3B 32 bit primary PCI slot 1 P1 32 bit primary PCI slot 2 P2 32 bit secondary PCI slot 3 P3 32 bit secondary PCI slot 4 P4 32 bit secondary PCI slot 5 P5 32 bit secondary PCI slot 6 P6 64 bit PCI slot 7 P7 64 bit PCI slot 8 P8 64 bit PCI slot 9 P9 64 bit PCI slot 10 P10 CPU baseboard with four 65 W 46A 6 2A 28 5A processors Primary memory module 16 256MB 13 6 A DIMMs Secondary memory module 16 13 6A 256MB DIMMs 3 5 inch diskette drive 0 65A CD ROM drive 0 55A 0 60A 1st SCA hard disk drive 2nd SCA hard disk drive continued Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage Table 20 4 Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage continued Current maximum at voltage levels Device 3 3 V 5 Vstby 5V 12 V 12 V Front panel plus six cooling fans 40A Total Current gt NOTE The total combined wattage must be less than 935 watts for your server configuration The current for each voltage level must be less than the limits prescribed by the above power supply output voltage specification see Table 20 2 Table 20 5 Total Combined Power Used by Your Server Voltage Level and Total Current Vx A W Total Watts for Each Voltage Level 3 3 V x A W 5 V x A W 5 V x A W 12 V x A W 12 V x A W 5 V Standby x A W Total C
228. rs must contain a memory module however only one memory module must be populated with memory DC to DC Voltage Converters The plug in VRM8 3 DC to DC converters on the CPU baseboard supply voltage for the processors and the L2 caches All the converters convert off the 12 V supply rail e Four converters supply voltage for the four processor cores e Two converters supply voltage for the four processor L2 caches two L2 caches share one converter An onboard switching converter provides the 1 5 V AGTL termination voltage V required by the CPU baseboard memory modules and processors A second onboard linear converter provides 2 5 V for the logic on the CPU baseboard clock buffers and voltage shifters Both converters use the 5 V supply rail as source voltage DS1624 SEEPROM 218 When the DS 1624 on the CPU baseboard is accessed via the LC bus it provides a temperature reading of the ambient temperature of the CPU baseboard The DS1624 also provides e time and date the CPU baseboard was manufactured e name of the board manufacturer e name and description of the board e serial number of the board e part number of the board Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers I O Interface The CPU baseboard interfaces with the PHP I O baseboard and memory modules through the grand connector on the midplane The I O interface portion of the grand connector provides the primary and secondary expander
229. ry Module near anne dee ee ten eee aA 134 Removing a Odia pal tds osas 136 DG 16 DG Converter YAM ee 139 GPU Tray ae an tee seen 141 CPU Tray Support Rail socios ar tad 142 Front Panel Boafd oia RER 143 CPL BASE DOAN ee een ne een ae ee neta 145 PHP I O Baseboard Expansion Slots u 147 Expansion Slot EE 147 Installing an Add in Board 148 gt VO Risen EE 151 ST Eeer 153 CCIE BO are ces ee e ee Gale meaner 155 PP OSB AS GD OIG EE 157 ll 160 Peripheral Bay Backplane a cionado 161 Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board nine I ala 163 ISC DIAN EEE 167 CD ROM Drive E 169 Snap in Plastic Slide UE 170 A eaten nee Peer Bi Ome Pia ou ee bre eee N rear ee he 173 Peripheral Bay Backplane EE 184 VO RISE Gate EE 192 J2C1 Configuration Jumper Block russ 193 PHP WO Baseboard NU EE 200 J31 JUMBOT D SEK A a ate AM a dE E Ee 220 GPU Baseboard Layout occiso ek ee 222 4 1 Interleave With Four DIMMS ENNEN 236 4 1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs nn 237 4 1 Interleave With 12 KU ON 238 Memory Module BEE 239 DIMM Orientation une ae 240 Properly Seated DIMM ana ac eege add 241 Removing RRE 242 Tables 7 1 7 2 17 1 18 1 18 2 19 1 20 1 20 2 20 3 20 4 20 5 23 1 Contents Jumper JP a ant dat ee ag eda A ere E LE 250 Lithium Back up Battery EE 260 Peripheral Bay Blindmate CONNECTOFS nen nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 279 EMP Console Access Modes Server configured for console redirection
230. s multiple devices in a single server The SVGA controller is fully compatible with these video standards CGA EGA Hercules graphics MDA and VGA The server comes with 2 MB of onboard video DRAM allowing the controller to support 132 column text modes and high resolution graphics with 1280 x 1024 x 16 colors Depending on the environment the controller displays up to 16 7 M colors in some video resolutions The SVGA controller supports analog VGA monitors single and multiple frequency interlaced and noninterlaced with a maximum vertical retrace interlaced frequency of 87 Hz Video Modes The CL GD5446 provides all the standard IBM VGA modes The following tables show all the supported video modes Standard VGA Modes Colors number Pixel Horiz Vert Modes palette Char x Char Display Freq Freq Freq in Hex size Row Cell Resolution Mode MHz KHz Hz 0 1 16 256K 40x25 9x16 360 X 400 Text 14 31 5 70 2 3 16 256K 80x25 9x16 720 X 400 Text 28 31 5 70 4 5 4 256K 40x25 8x8 320 X 200 Graphics 12 5 31 5 70 6 2 256K 80x25 8x8 640 X 200 Graphics 25 31 5 70 7 Mono 80x25 9x16 720 X 400 Text 28 31 5 70 D 16 256K 40x25 8x8 320 X 200 Graphics 12 5 31 5 70 E 16 256K 80x25 8x14 640 X 200 Graphics 25 31 5 70 F Mono 80x25 8x14 640 X 350 Graphics 25 31 5 70 10 16 256K 80x25 8x14 640 X 350 Graphics 25 31 5 70 11 2 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 25 31 5 60 11 2 256K 80x30 8x16 640 X 480 Graphics 31 5 37 9 72 1
231. s on the Server System Configuration Software CD shipped with the server The SSU provides a graphical user interface GUI over an extensible framework for server configuration For the AC450NX systems the SSU framework supports the following functions and capabilities e assigns resources to baseboard devices and add in cards prior to loading the operating system OS e allows you to specify boot device order and system security options e permits viewing and clearing of the system s critical event log e Permits viewing of the system FRU and SDRs e allows troubleshooting of the server when the OS is not operational e provides a system level view of the server s I O devices When to Run the System Setup Utility The SSU is a DOS based utility that supports extended system configuration operations for onboard resources and add in boards The utility also allows you to view the system event log SEL and to set system boot and security options Use the SSU when you need to e add and remove boards affecting the assignment of resources ports memory IRQs DMA e modify the server s boot device order or security settings e change the server configuration settings e save and restore the server configuration e view or clear the SEL e view FRU information e view the SDR table If you install or remove an ISA add in board you must run the SSU to reconfigure the server Running the SSU is optional for a PCI and ISA Plug and Play add i
232. sages that POST can generate see Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages 4 Setup Utility When to Run The flash resident BIOS Setup utility is used to configure PHP I O baseboard resources It is stored in both flash memory NVRAM and the battery backed memory of the real time clock RTC on the PHP I O baseboard When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup is a flash based configuration utility that is used to configure onboard resources and to set user selectable options such as boot device ordering keyboard autorepeat and security Use Setup to configure the server into a bootable state and then use the SSU and other utilities to further configure the server Setup lets you change the server configuration defaults It does not allow you to enter or change information about PCI or ISA add in boards you must use the SSU instead Setup stores the configuration values in flash memory they take effect when you boot the server POST checks these values against the actual hardware configuration if they do not agree POST generates an error message You must then run Setup to specify the correct configuration You can run Setup with or without an operating system being present Because values entered using Setup are overwritten when you run the SSU you should run Setup only under the following conditions e If the diskette drive is disabled e Ifthe server has a diskette drive that is disabled or imprope
233. server name can be selected from the dropdown list of available servers A server must be selected when the line selection is Dial up e Serial Line These options are enabled when the line selection is set to Direct connect Serial Line Baud Rate must be 19200 for EMP to connect properly COM Port No set the COM Port number to the port which the null modem serial cable is connected to e Connect initiates the connection to the connected server When this button is clicked you are prompted for the EMP password 84 Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console How to Use e Config displays the Phonebook dialog e Cancel exits the Connect dialog without taking any action e Help displays the help information for this dialog Power On Off Selecting Power On Off from the Action menu displays the Power on off dialog This dialog provides commands to remotely power on or power off the server Power on off EE Dperation Dption Post power up option EMP active Powe O Allow BIOS Redirect Cancel Help Figure 7 4 Power On Off Dialog Options available in the dialog are e Power ON powers on the server e Power OFF powers off the server This option is not allowed if the server is configured in RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations e Post power up option sets the mode selection of the server to EMP active or BIOS redirection The setting is available after the next power up The default
234. ssword e Set a user password e Activate the secure mode hot key e Disable writing to the diskette drive Password Protection BIOS passwords prevent unauthorized tampering with the server If you set the user password but not the administrative password the BIOS requires you to enter the user password before you can boot the server or run the SSU If you set both passwords entering either password lets you boot the server or enable the keyboard and mouse Only the administrative password lets you change the server configuration with the flash resident Setup utility Secure Boot Mode The secure boot mode allows the server to boot and run the operating system OS However you cannot use either the keyboard or the mouse until you enter the user password You can use Setup to put the server in the secure boot mode If the BIOS detects a disk in the CD ROM drive or a diskette in floppy drive A at boot time it prompts you for a password When you enter the password the server boots from the disk in the CD ROM drive or the diskette in drive A Entering a password also disables the secure mode If there is no disk in the CD ROM drive or diskette in drive A the server boots from drive C It automatically goes into secure mode All enabled secure mode features go into effect at boot time If you set a hot key combination you can secure the server immediately Boot Sequence Control The BIOS security features determine the boot devices
235. sts there may be a problem with the hard disk drive PHP I O baseboard drive signal cable or LED connector Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages Problems With Application Software If you have problems with application software do the following 1 Verify that the software is properly configured for the server Refer to the software installation and operation documentation to set up and use the software 2 Try a different copy of the software to see if the problem is with the copy you are using 3 Make sure all cables are installed correctly 4 Verify that the baseboard jumpers are set correctly 5 If other software runs correctly on the server contact your vendor about the failing software If the problem persists contact the software vendor s customer service representative for assistance Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down If the server powers up after a DC power failure and then immediately powers down check the power supply failure LED If it is lit wait until it goes out before turning the server back on If the LED does not go out you may have to unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlets When the LED goes out plug the power cords back into the outlets If the problem persists the power distribution backplane may be defective Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Erro
236. t Cover 147 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 148 10 11 Being careful not to touch the components or gold edge connectors on the add in board remove it from the protective wrapper and place it component side up on a nonconductive antistatic surface Record the serial number of the board in your equipment log Set any jumpers or switches according to the board manufacturer s instructions Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners and firmly press it into an expansion slot on the PHP I O baseboard Figures 13 13 The tapered foot of the board retaining bracket must fit into the mating slot in the expansion slot frame Secure the add in board to the expansion slot frame using the expansion slot cover retaining screw Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 If you installed an ISA add in board run the SSU to reconfigure the server Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add in board For information about running this utility see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run OM07331 Figure 13 13 Installing an Add in Board A 16 bit ISA slot ISA board component side up B 32 bit PCI slot PCI board component side down C 64 bit hot swap PCI slot PCI boar
237. t Direct Connect if a null modem serial cable directly connects the server s COM 2 port to the EMP Console client machine If they are connected via a modem select Modem Mode Console Redirection Submenu The settings in the Console Redirection Submenu of the Server menu must be set exactly as noted to be able to use the EMP COM Port Address Select 2F8 This is the COM 2 port that must be used by the EMP The IRQ setting is automatically populated with the correct number based on the COM Port Address choice Baud Rate Select 19 2k Flow Control Select CTS RTS CD 81 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Main EMP Console Window The main EMP Console window provides a graphical user interface GUI to access server control operations and to launch the management plug ins At the top of the window is the menu and tool bar These provide the options to initiate plug ins and other support features A status bar at the bottom displays connection information such as server name line status and mode Toolbar The tool bar buttons of the EMP Console main window combine server control and management plug in commands available from both the Connect and Action menus as follows Displays the Connect dialog to allow connection to a selected server Disconnects from the currently connected server Displays the Power On Off dialog Displays the Reset dialog JEE SEL Launches the SEL Viewer not available on AC450NX servers
238. t access or replace the fans integrated in the power supplies There are no serviceable components in the power supply If the power supply is opened the warranty is voided Check the following Is AC power available at the wall outlet Is the server power cord properly connected to AC inlet filter and the wall outlet Did you press the power on off push button switch Is the power on light lit UUUU Have any of the fan motors stopped use the server management subsystem to check the fan status If switches and connections are correct and AC power is available at the wall outlet contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages No Characters Appear on Screen Check the following Is the keyboard working Is the video monitor plugged in and turned on a a Q Are the brightness and contrast controls on the video monitor properly adjusted Q Are the switch settings on the video monitor correct LI Is the video monitor signal cable properly installed If you are using an add in video controller board do the following Verify that the video controller board is fully seated in the PHP I O baseboard connector Run the SSU to specify that an add in VGA EGA controller board is installed Reboot the server for changes to take effect If there are still no characters on the screen after you reboot the server and POST emits a beep code wr
239. t detected 0297 Memory size decreased 0299 ECC Error Correction failure 0370 Keyboard controller error 0373 Keyboard stuck key detected 0375 Keyboard and mouse swapped 0430 Timer Channel 2 failure 0440 Gate A20 failure 0441 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 0445 Master interrupt controller error 0446 Slave interrupt controller error 0450 Master DMA controller error 0451 Slave DMA controller error 0452 DMA controller error 0460 Fail safe timer NMI failure 0461 Software port NMI failure 0465 Bus time out NMI in slot 0467 Expansion board NMI in slot 0510 PCI parity error 0710 Baseboard device resource conflict 0711 Static device resource conflict 0780 PCI Segment 1 memory request exceeds 998 MB 0781 PCI Segment 1 I O requests exceeds 12K 0782 PCI I O request exceeds amount available 0783 PCI memory request exceeds amount available 0784 Illegal bus for memory request below 1 MB 0785 Memory request below 1 MB exceeds 1 MB 0800 PCI I O port conflict 0801 PCI memory conflict continued 274 Chapter 22 Solving Problems Troubleshooting Error Messages POST Error Codes and Messages continued Code 0802 0804 0805 0806 0810 0811 0812 0815 0816 0817 0820 0900 0903 0982 0984 0985 0986 0987 8100 8101 8102 8103 8104 8105 8106 8107 8108 810B 810C 810D 810E 810F 8110 8128 8129 8130 8131 8138 8139 Error message PCI IRQ conflict PCI ROM not found may be OK for this card Insuffic
240. t populated with DIMMs You must install two high capacity DRAM memory modules and one of them must be populated with DIMMs ECC memory detects and corrects single bit errors from DRAM in real time allowing your server to function normally despite data transmission errors ECC detects all double bit errors but does not correct them it also detects but does not correct three bit and four bit adjacent errors in a DRAM nibble Single bit errors are reported down to the exact bit within DIMM Multiple bit errors are reported down to an interleave which corresponds to a single DIMM 233 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide EDO DRAM Array 234 The extended data out EDO DRAM array on the memory module consists of sixteen 72 bit 64 bit data plus 8 ECC bits DIMM sockets They are divided into four memory banks A D of four sockets each These banks support only 4 1 interleaving DIMMs in all four sockets For example in bank A socket e Jl contains interleave O e J2 contains interleave 1 e J3 contains interleave 2 e J4 contains interleave 3 Because each interleave provides access to 72 bits of data 4 1 interleaving yields 288 bits 32 bytes per DRAM transaction one cache line for the processor If the CPU baseboard contains two 4 1 interleaving memory modules successive DRAM transactions occurring in the different memory modules complete at a maximum rate of one transaction every 30 ns This yields a maximum data rate of 1
241. tatic wrist strap recommended e Pen or pencil Equipment Log Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B Equipment Log to record the model and serial numbers of the server all installed options and any other pertinent information about the server You will need this information when running the SSU Diskette Drive The 3 5 inch diskette drive in the 3 5 inch user accessible drive bay supports 720 KB 1 25 MB 1 44 MB and 2 88 MB media Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved add in devices 165 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Removing the Diskette Drive See Figure 14 1 1 2 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling Disconnect the power and signal cables from the 3 5 inch diskette drive Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to the 3 5 inch drive bay to the peripheral bay Pull the diskette drive and tray from the peripheral bay Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to its support tray and place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Replacing the Diskette Drive 166 See Figure 14 1 1 RAN BS E Remove the 3 5 inch diskette drive from the protective packaging and place it component side up on a nonconductive static free surface Reco
242. ten the screw firmly 8 0 inch pounds Connect the ICMB signal cable to J1 on the riser card Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07323 Figure 13 14 I O Riser Card A J1B1 I O connector B Screw C ICMB signal cable 151 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide UO Tray The I O Tray provides rigid mounting for the PHP I O baseboard and facilitates mating with the midplane Removing the I O Tray See Figure 13 15 1 2 10 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the add in boards installed in the expansion slots Remove the add in boards as described earlier This step is not required unless replacing the PHP I O baseboard Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the PHP I O baseboard Remove the three screws securing the tray to the chassis Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers to eject the tray out of the midplane Lift the tray from the chassis Reinstalling the I O Tray 152 See Figure 13 15 1 Ze Sch Oy OR Position the tray over the chassis and lower it on to its supports Simultaneously rotate the eject insert levers into the locked position This action also mates the
243. ter 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers Front Panel Controller FPC Where located on the front panel board What it manages server power control consolidation from several sources push button power signal from the front panel connector real time clock RTC server monitor module SMM if installed commands from the Intelligent Platform Management Bus IPMB power and reset switch interfaces fault LEDs chassis midplane and power supplies Field Replacement Unit FRU inventory interface server hard reset generation server power fault indication Intelligent Chassis Management Bus ICMB bridge device EMP connection LCD interface Board Management Controller BMC Where located on the PHP I O baseboard What it provides temperature and voltage monitoring of the I O and CPU baseboards threshold comparison functions SMI systems management interrupt generation watchdog timer and certain GPIO general purpose input output functions fault resilient booting processor presence Voltage ID VID IERR and thermal trip monitoring server event log event time stamping sensor data record information and DIMM ID information interface current event status and sensor readings when polled by System Management Software Hot swap Controller HSC Where located on the disk backplane What it does implements the SAF TE command set controls the fault lights and drive power on
244. the DIMMs one at a time CAUTION Use extreme care when removing a DIMM Too much pressure can damage the socket slot Apply only enough pressure on the plastic ejector levers to release the DIMM 5 Gently push the plastic ejector levers out and down to eject the DIMM from the socket Figure 19 7 6 Carefully lift the DIMM away from the socket and store it in an antistatic package 7 Repeat the above steps to remove other DIMMs OM06768 Figure 19 7 Removing DIMMs 8 Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 13 9 Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12 10 Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server 11 Turn on your monitor and then your server 12 Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory Failure to do so may degrade the performance of your server For information about running the SSU see Chapter 5 System Setup Utility When to Run Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory System Management Interface The devices on DC bus of the memory module provide system management software with module operating temperature DIMM configuration and field replacement unit FRU data The devices also provide e time and date the module was manufactured e name of the module manufacturer e name and description of the module e serial number of the module e part number of the module 243 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Memory Modu
245. tion of the drive including severely impacted performance and data corruption Chapter 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hotswapping GS N B N en OM07153 Figure 10 1 Hard Disk Drive and Carrier A EMI ESD grounding clips and fingers B SCA connector C SCSI hard disk drive D Drive carrier handle OM08268 Figure 10 2 Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assembly A Four screws 103 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot docking Bay See Figure 10 3 1 Orient the carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot docking bay guide rails so that metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up Make sure that the carrier is placed correctly into the guide rails to avoid damage 2 While grasping only the drive carrier handle firmly push the assembly into the bay until the drive docks with the peripheral bay backplane connector CAUTION Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push the assembly into the bay Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of the bracket 104 Chapter 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hotswapping OM07336 Figure 10
246. tions A ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandgren A ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosjonsfare Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukt batteri returneres apparatleverandgren A VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion A VAROITUS Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti 258 Chapter 21 Back up Battery Replacing Disposing Replacing the Back up Battery See Figure 21 1 1 2 3 4 Gi Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines Turn the server off and unplug the AC power cord Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Using the tip of your finger press down lightly on the lithium battery and slide it toward the tabs on the socket Gently lift the battery out of the socket and dispose of it according to local ordinance Remove the new battery from its package and being careful to observe correct polarity positive side up gently insert it into the battery socket
247. to install on your server Follow the installation instructions in the README TXT file Follow these steps to install these drivers 1 Fully configure your server This can include adding application software an ISA add in board PCI add in boards and the like 2 Insert disk 1 of the video drivers and utilities for MS DOSt and Windows into drive A 3 At the DOS command prompt type A install and press lt Enter gt 4 Follow the onscreen directions to install the video drivers Installing SCSI Drivers After copying the SCSI drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes follow the instructions in the README TXT file on the first diskette to install the drivers 37 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Server Won t Boot From the CD It is possible that your server was shipped with the diskette drive or another device set as the first boot device If so the server will try to boot from a diskette or other device rather than from the CD we have provided By pressing lt Esc gt during POST you can override the boot sequence specified in Setup by selecting a different primary boot device This override is valid only for that specific boot Subsequent boots revert back to the sequence specified in Setup If the chosen device fails to load the operating system the BIOS reverts to the previous boot sequence The lt Esc gt hot key is valid while the Press lt F2 gt key to enter Setup message is displayed on th
248. two banks in the second module See the DIMM interleave configurations in Figures 19 1 through 19 3 235 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07332 Figure 19 1 4 1 Interleave With Four DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank C J9 J12 empty B Bank B J5 J8 empty D Bank D J13 J16 empty 236 Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory OM07340 Figure 19 2 4 1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank C J9 J12 empty B Bank B J5 J8 populated D Bank D J13 J16 empty 237 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide OM07341 Figure 19 3 4 1 Interleave With 12 DIMMs A Bank A J1 J4 populated C Bank C J9 J12 populated B Bank B J5 J8 populated D Bank D J13 J16 empty 238 Chapter 19 Memory Modules Description Adding Memory Memory Module Layout E F OMO7307 Figure 19 4 Memory Module Layout J1 J4 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank A J5 J8 168 pin DIMM sockets Bank B J9 J12 168 pi
249. u Elle Te el DEE ECU E ee Kl EE System Event Log Manager Add me Sensor Data Record SDR Manager Add In Field Replaceable Unit FRU Manager sssseseesssssrnneesserrrrrsserrerrrrnnrrrrnrrnnnrssrrrnn EXIING NE SS UN a ne en ses SCSI Configuration Utility Emergency Management Port Console How to Use How EMP Console Work te WT EE Setting Up the Server for the EMP iii Seve de o qe Console Redirection Submenu me aa aea a Aa a a Main EMP Console Window ccccccccceccceeccseeeceeueceeueuseeeueseueuueseueueeueuseeaaueeueaseuauueeneueeneaaues TODA iia Ee E A ee Se SIALUS EE EMP Console Main Men Server Control OperationS asii ee Connect 2 it ae e tt da es Rte oh Aloe Bog OBS lh Are Power OU Ener a ae Set PROS EE E EE E Pete ERUMIGWBR SSSR RS do atone FRU and SDR Load Utility When to Run When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility sisi What You Need to Do i ia How You Use the FRUSDR Load Ulloa ac Command Line Formats EE Parsing the Command Line u ee ee Displaying Usage Informationen een Contents Displaying a Given Area EE 92 Using Specified CEG EE 95 9 Hot swappable Fans Hot Swapping Tools and Supplies You Need a 97 Equpmentlod EE 97 Hot Swapping A Fan ek ie fad ae eee daa ae dans Sk ae ceeds ee ee 98 Removing a FAN EE 98 Replacind a Pal EE 100 10 Hot swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives Installing Hot Swapping Hot docking E 101 Tools and Supplies YOU Need EE 101 FAUBMER le EE 101 SCSI SCA Hard
250. uentially attempts to boot from each device To change the boot device priority 1 2 3 4 Click on the device to select it Click on the Move Up button to move the device up Click on Move Down button to move the device down Click on the Save button to save the boot order in the system nonvolatile storage El System Setup uta Ir a Multiboot Options Add in GE EEE Boot Device Priority Removable Devices Hard Drive ATAPI CD ROM Drive Hard Drives Bootable Add in L Move Up Move Down PS Fe Figure 5 6 Multiboot Main Window 67 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Security Add in The Security Add in PWA provides security and password support options Within the PWA you can either set or modify the User and Administrator passwords or update any of the various security options available To Set the User Password 1 Click on the user password button 2 Enter the password in the first field 3 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field To Change or Clear the User Password 1 Click on the User password button 2 Enter the old password in the first field 3 Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password 4 Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password To Set the Administrator Password 1 Click on the Administrator password button 2 Enter the password in the first
251. un Feature Processor 3 Processor 4 Keyboard Features Numlock Key Click Keyboard auto repeat rate Keyboard auto repeat delay Language Advanced Menu Option Auto On Off Disabled Enabled 30 sec 26 7 sec 21 8 sec 18 5 sec 13 3 sec 10 sec 6 sec 2 sec 1 4 sec 1 2 sec 3 4 sec 1 sec English US Frangais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Description Stepping ID absent or disabled Stepping ID absent or disabled Press lt Enter gt for options Select power on state for numlock Enabled produces the key click Select key repeat rate Select delay before key repeat Select the display language for the BIOS Setup Warning Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction Feature Plug amp Play O S Reset Configuration Data Enable ACPI Use Multiprocessor Specification Large Disk Access Mode Option No Yes No Yes No Yes 1 1 1 4 CHS LBA Description Select Yes if you are using a Plug and Play capable operating system Select No if you need the BIOS to configure nonboot devices Select Yes if you want to clear the system configuration data Select Yes if you want to enable the advanced configuration and power interface ACPI BIOS Configure the Multiprocessor Specification revision level Some OSs require 1 1 for compatibility Select the drive access method for IDE drives Most OSs use logical block addr
252. unique EMP password If the administrator enters a new EMP password or clears an old one the BIOS sends the appropriate command via the I C bus interface to the FPC If the administrator wants to change the password from within Setup again the new password must be entered twice If the administrator sets the Password Clear jumper to the Clear position the BIOS clears the administrator and user passwords It also attempts to clear the EMP password If the FPC is not present or is not functioning properly the BIOS times out and continues 27 2 On site Installation Installing the Server This chapter tells how to e Selecta site e Connect input and output devices e Turn on the server and create installation diskettes from the Server System Configuration Software CD e Read and print a copy of this manual e Exit to DOS A WARNING The minimum server configuration weighs about 51 4 kg 113 Ibs and the maximum one weighs close to 60 kg 132 Ibs To avoid personal injury have someone help you move the server Do not attempt to lift or move the server by holding the handles on the power supply Selecting a Site The server operates reliably within the specified environmental limits see page 30 The chosen site must be close to a grounded power outlet applicable for the electrical code of that region The minimum available power requirements are described in Chapter 20 Power System Description Calculating Power Usage A CAU
253. upply related management functions Operator accessible areas are mechanically shielded from energy hazards while hot swapping installing or removing a hard disk drive or a system fan PCI hot plug expansion boards are 240VA protected by current limiting circuitry on the PHP I O board Care must be taken not to overload an AC mains circuit by plugging to many loads into a single AC circuit It is recommended to either plugging the power cord of the server in a separate circuit or calculating the current drawn from loads attached to an AC circuit to make sure AC current limits will not been exceeded If a power supply fails in the redundant power system an LED marked FAIL at the back of the power supply illuminates yellow If a power supply predictive failure event occurs in the redundant power system an LED marked PRFL at the back of the power supply blinks yellow In both cases the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel starts flashing The supply can be hot swapped removed and replaced without turning off the power or impacting server operations If the load on a single power supply exceeds the output ratings defined in Table 20 2 an LED marked FAIL at the back of the power supply blinks yellow and the entire power system is shut down 251 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Power Supply Input Voltages Power Supply Output Voltages 252 Table 20 1 Power Supply AC Input Ratings Para
254. us der Steckdose 4 Auf der R ckseite des Systems beschriften und ziehen Sie alle Anschlu kabel von den I O Anschl ssen oder Ports ab 5 Tragen Sie ein geerdetes Antistatik Gelenkband um elektrostatische Ladungen ESD ber blanke Metallstellen bei der Handhabung der Komponenten zu vermeiden 6 Schalten Sie das System niemals ohne ordnungsgem montiertes Geh use ein Nachdem Sie die oben erw hnten ersten sechs SICHERHEITSSCHRITTE durchgef hrt haben k nnen Sie die Abdeckung abnehmen indem Sie 1 Entfernen Sie alle Schrauben der Gehauseabdeckung 2 Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab Zur ordnungsgem en K hlung und L ftung mu die Geh useabdeckung immer wieder vor dem Einschalten installiert werden Ein Betrieb des Systems ohne angebrachte Abdeckung kann Ihrem System oder Teile darin besch digen Um die Abdeckung wieder anzubringen 1 Vergewissern Sie sich da Sie keine Werkzeuge oder Teile im Innern des Systems zur ckgelassen haben 2 berpr fen Sie alle Kabel Zusatzkarten und andere Komponenten auf ordnungsgem en Sitz und Installation 3 Bringen Sie die Abdeckungen wieder am Geh use an indem Sie die zuvor gel sten Schrauben wieder anbringen Ziehen Sie diese gut an 4 Schlie en Sie alle externen Kabel und den AC Stromanschlu stecker Ihres Systems wieder an Fortsetzung Appendix C Warnings WARNUNG Deutsch Fortsetzung Der Mikroprozessor und der K hler sind m glicherweise erhitzt wenn das
255. ve the fan array housing as described earlier Remove the CPU tray as described earlier Remove the peripheral bay as described earlier Tag and disconnect all cables to the board Remove and save the screws that attached the board to the chassis and remove the board Place the board on a nonconductive static free surface or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board 162 1 SERIEN Remove the board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed itin one Attach the board to chassis Connect all cables Reinstall the peripheral bay as described earlier Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling Chapter 13 Server Components Removing Reinstalling OM07342 Figure 13 20 Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board A Screw four 163 14 Removable Media Drives Installing Removing Replacing This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall removable media drives Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on page 115 Tools and Supplies You Need e Phillips cross head screwdriver 1 bit and 2 bit e Small flat bladed screwdriver e Antis
256. ver 120 See Figure 12 2 1 Position the peripheral bay cover in position and press into place Chapter 12 Server Covers Removing Reinstalling OM07356 Figure 12 2 Peripheral Bay Cover and Front Bezel A Plastic snap on Peripheral Bay Cover B Plastic snap on Front Bezel Removing the Front Bezel The plastic front bezel is attached to the chassis with press in rivets and spring clips in the same manner as the peripheral bay cover 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Remove the peripheral bay cover as described earlier 3 Grasp the bezel hand and pull 4 Place the bezel on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched Reinstalling the Front Bezel 1 Install the peripheral bay cover as described earlier 2 Position the front bezel in position and press into place Removing the Top Cover See Figures 12 3 and 12 4 1 Observe the precautions on page 115 Safety Guidelines 2 Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server 3 Turn the server off with the push button on off power switch on the front panel 4 Unplug the AC power cord from the power inlet receptacle or from the power source outlet 5 Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I O panel on the back of the server 121 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide 6 Remove and save the screws that attach the top cover to the chassis gt NOTE It is not necessary t
257. ves 18 I O baseboard 20 reinstalling 156 removing 156 I O riser card 20 192 connectors 20 Index keyboard and mouse ports 213 parallel port 214 serial ports 213 video port 215 reinstalling 150 removing 150 VO Tray reinstalling 152 removing 152 ICMB board reinstalling 154 removing 154 bus 19 31 32 IDE controller 190 interface 20 Indicators cooling fault LED yellow 24 drive fault LED yellow 24 front panel LCD 24 power fault LED yellow 24 SCSI drive in recovery mode 106 SCSI drive status descriptions 106 Interconnect backplane 20 ISA 17 add in board installing 148 bus master slot 146 expansion slot 186 J Jumpers boot option 197 CMOS 194 CPU baseboard 220 changing a setting 221 flash memory 195 password 195 K Keyboard connecting 31 Keyboard mouse controller 20 303 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide L LCD module reinstalling 131 removing 131 Lights CD ROM drive 24 DC power 24 diskette drive 24 power supply 266 Mass storage device CD ROM 168 diskette drive 165 Memory module 19 DIMMs 233 installing 240 removing 242 interleaving 234 reinstalling 133 removing 132 Memory module connector signal section 244 Messages beep codes 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 port 80h codes 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 POST error codes 273 midplane reinstalling 158 removing 158 Monitor connecting 31 O Operati
258. vices in the server through enclosure service messages The disk backplane power control provides powering down of a drive when a failure is detected and reported to the SCSI bus through enclosure service messages When a new drive is inserted in an SCA connector the power control waits a short time for the drive to become fully seated and 183 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide then applies power to the drive Power control also lets you insert and store a spare drive in an SCA connector When a drive fails the spare drive can be put into service SCSI ID Configurations The SCSI chip on the peripheral bay backplane uses the SAF TE protocol to communicate with the I O baseboard and uses SCSI ID 6 Peripheral Bay Backplane Connectors OM07352 Figure 16 1 Peripheral Bay Backplane A SCSI Hot Swap connector SCSI Hot Swap connector Power connector Diskette connector IDE connector Power connector Blindmate connector SCSI connector zommoom 184 17 PHP I O Baseboard Description Setting Configuration Jumpers This chapter describes the PHP I O baseboard and tells how to configure the jumpers Warnings and Cautions Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of the components inside the server Before removing the covers see Safety Guidelines on
259. wer 281 Wide SCSI 283 Connectors on PHP I O baseboard 32 bit PCI 205 64 bit PCI 206 diskette drive port 208 F16 bus 201 front panel 211 PC 211 IDE port 210 ISA 207 legacy 212 USB port 212 wide fast 16 bit SCSI port 209 connectors peripheral bay blindmate 279 Controllers board management 191 diskette drive 20 front panel 191 hot swap 191 IDE 190 keyboard mouse 20 Symbios 53C896 LVDS 185 video 20 187 301 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Controls and indicators CD ROM drive 24 diskette drive 24 front panel 24 status LEDs hot docking bays 24 Cooling and airflow 119 Cooling system 18 Covers front bezel removing 121 PCI hot plug removing 123 peripheral bay removing 120 removable 119 top reinstalling 123 removing 121 CPU baseboard 19 component layout 222 DC to DC converters 218 features 217 front side bus 219 terminator module 219 V O connector power section 204 229 I O interface 219 jumpers 220 changing a setting 221 processors 217 reinstalling 144 removing 144 SEEPROM 218 symmetric multiprocessor 217 CPU tray reinstalling 140 removing 140 Current usage 253 D DC to DC converters 217 218 installing 138 removing 138 DIMMs installing 240 removing 242 Diskette drive controller 20 ejector button 24 removing 166 replacing 166 Drive bay 3 5 inch 18 Drive fault light slow blinking 106 Drive indicators
260. window It lets you examine SEL records e via the Baseboard Management Controller BMC in hex or verbose mode e by sensor type or event type in hex or verbose mode e from a previously stored binary file in hex or verbose mode The SEL Manager window also lets you e save the SEL records to a file in either text or binary form e clear the SEL entries from the nonvolatile storage area SEL Manager Menus Click on File Load SEL Save SEL Clear SEL Exit View SEL Info All Events By Sensor By Event View Realtime Settings Display HEX Display Verbose Output Binary Output Text Help About to view data from a previously saved SEL file save the currently loaded SEL data to a file clear the SEL data from the BMC quit the SEL Viewer display information about the SEL these fields are display only display the current SEL data from the BMC bring up a pop up menu that allows you to load only the data from a certain sensor type bring up a pop up menu that allows you to load only the data from a certain event type toggle between the Hex interpreted mode of displaying the SEL records determine whether SEL data will be saved to the file as under File Save in binary format or verbose format display the SEL Viewer version information Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility When to Run system setup utitity LE D SEL Manager DD GE Pre Init Timestamp Lower Critical going low Trigger Reading 0x0000 Tri
261. wly e No characters appear on screen e Characters on the screen appear distorted or incorrect e No beep or incorrect beep pattern emitted e Activity light on the diskette drive does not light e Activity light on the hard disk drive does not light e Activity light on the CD ROM drive does not light e Application software problems are unresolved e Server powers up and it immediately powers down Try the solutions in the order given If you cannot correct the problem contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance 265 AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide Power Light Does Not Light Check the following Q Is the server operating normally If so the power LED is probably defective Q Are there other problems with the server If so check the items listed under Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly Q Is the yellow power supply failure LED flashing If so replace the failing power supply If all items are correct and problems persist contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly If the server cooling fans are not operating properly server components will be damaged gt NOTE 266 The server contains six fans that provide cooling for the components The integrated fan on each power supply provides more cooling for the SCSI hard disk drives in the hot docking bays In case of cooling problems you canno
262. your power line If you are experiencing any of the above symptoms that might indicate voltage spikes on the power line you may want to install a surge suppressor between the power outlet and the server power cord If the problem recurs after you have checked and corrected all the above items refer to More Troubleshooting Procedures on page 264 If you receive any error messages refer to Error Codes and Messages on page 269 for an explanation and suggestions More Troubleshooting Procedures This section provides a more detailed approach to identifying a problem and locating its source Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing CAUTION Before disconnecting any peripheral cables from the server turn off the server and any external peripheral devices Failure to do so can cause permanent damage to the server and or the peripheral devices Turn off the server and all external peripheral devices Disconnect all devices from the server except the keyboard and video monitor Make sure the server power cord is plugged into a properly grounded AC outlet Chapter 2 Make sure your video monitor and keyboard are correctly connected to the server Turn on the monitor Set its brightness and contrast controls to at least two thirds of their maximum ranges refer to the documentation supplied with your monitor If the operating system normally loads from the hard disk drive make sure there is no diskette in drive A Ifthe OS normally lo

Intel AC450NX Stereo System User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents